Home

R&S®FSW-K91 WLAN Measurements User Manual

1. 320 CALCulate LIMItEBURSEEVM DATA MAXimuUm 281 5 320 nennen 281 9 1 320 CALCulate EIMICBURSEEVM PIEOEMAXIIUI cac ron ea tran ec peto out timentes atrae ruere vane 282 2 321 CALGulate EIMIEB RSEEVM PIEot AVERGQe i reor ett eontra te te ncn nta ttr inre s 282 CALCulate LIMitBURSEtEVM PILot AVERage RESUlt eese 321 CALCulate EIMICBURSEFERROr AVERAge treten ttti oun repete pets 282 CALCulate EIMIEBURSEFERRor AVERAage tatnen eerte 321 CALCulate EIMIEBURSECIQOFfset AVERage 1 rere nitrate trt Co teg ez eria tao 282 321 283 CALCulate LIMit tBURSt SYMBolerror
2. sao ten XXE RAS Es be SK TO ASIE A EEEE E EOE TEETAN 314 FETCH BURSEEVM ALL AVERGageY cccit rrt rennen tenete err d xe rn tiene annette 317 FETCh BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum 314 FETGRBURSEEVM AEIMAXIIUITE sucre tre ere e op XH e RN ERAN ERE RE RUNE YER SEEKS 317 FETCHh BURSEEVM ALL MINIImUTI uci ttt rr rtp ere Ee 314 FETCh BURSEEVMEALIEMINImUtm san ceat ciet t rh t tt nh er ER e Pe ec ea EE ERR 317 FETGRBURSCEVM IBATAJAVERGSOST rcr prev SEN RF SEE e 315 FETCH BURSEEVM IDATA MAXIIUITI cerner capers ei rri rne rre Een e ne Ee cie gea 315 FETCh BURSEEVM DATA MINImUtm itte renti etuer tp etri e 315 FETCh BURStEVM DIRect AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM DIRect MAXimum 7 55 AATE 315 6 cos cas arecancusectcnscasvcnwcansusieev con cat SET OT IHE EE OY ORE ege aad 315 FETCH BURSEEVMEPILot rrr rhet rien trae ter ne E RYE dens 315 FETCh BURStEVM PILOt M
3. 265 I SENSe BANDwWidIh CHANN AUTO TYPE 266 SENSe DEMOd FORMGaEBANAalyz 2 1 2 2 crines it eia duae 268 0 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONtent AUTO ecce tenni 271 SENSe DEMod FORMatMCS index viens 1 22 cess sitse ete ed sa ae ic Ee 271 5 271 5 4 5 8 272 SENS DEMod FORMatNnSTSindex MODE 272 SENSe DEMod FORMat 273 CONFigure WLAN EXTension AUTO TYPE lt PPDUType gt Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis according to the Ness Extension Spatial Streams field content for IEEE 802 11n standard only Parameters lt PPDUType gt FBURst ALL MO M1 M2 DO D1 D2 D3 The first PPDU is analyzed and subsequent PPDUs are ana lyzed only if they match FBURst The Ness field contents of the first PPDU is detected and subse quent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same Ness field contents cor
4. 200 oco oorr te eto extr et cone Pera E XY M AVE ED ON x 200 EAYOUUADDEWINDOW cteu anes toten et bct ce B ctp ec ctt de E D c oer e dd 289 EAYout CATalogEWINDOWJT trot rine cepi pa eae IARE 292 female ids bo 22 293 EAYout REMove WINBOWg rentre rne n rnt rn ert reete ern erc eee LAYout REPLace WINDow R EAYOUUWINDOWSnDSADDY i occa tmp Uer dete wanna 295 LAYout WINDows lt n gt iIDENtily iain 295 EAYoUtWINDOWSIns eraat eni AE NEET 296 LAYout WINDowsr REPBLAC6 ceret pter tete tl gp pete ide eset e 296 MMEMeory EOAD IQ S TATe nciht to error tear y hr sevens FER ER ERES MMEMory LOAD SEM STATe ees 5 lt 2 STA tee dele ee E tp te e REO a s 343 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRGCIOH rn ee tr rota e EE rr
5. 121 121 Reference Level Settings The reference level defines the expected maximum signal level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display Reference Level Mode Reference Level Settings By default the reference level is automatically adapted to its optimal value for the cur rent input data continuously At the same time the internal attenuators and the pre amplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compres sion clipping and overload conditions are minimized User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 118 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance In order to define the reference level manually switch to Manual mode In this case you must define the following reference level parameters Remote command CONF POW AUTO ON see CONFigure POWer AUTO on page 237 Reference Level Reference Level Settings Defines the expected maximum signal level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display This value is overwritten if Auto Level mode is turned on Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 238 Signal Level RMS Reference Level Settings Specifies the mean power level of
6. 282 CALCulate LIMIEBURSEFPERROGE TAVER amp sde aca cotta re ten o netten 282 CALCulate LIMIEBURSEFERROPMAXIIJDM 22 2 27 2 2 01a cada 282 CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset AVERage essere 282 CALCulatecLIMIEBURSEIQOPISeEMADSIDIRI 2 ua ou adus uo rtt X tate vente 282 2 283 CALOulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror MAXimum cesses nnne 283 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance CALCulate LIMit BURSt ALL Limits This command sets or returns the limit values for the parameters determined by the default WLAN measurement all in one step see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 To define individual limit values use the individual CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt BURSt commands Note that the units for the EVM and gain imbalance parameters must be defined in advance using the following commands UNIT EVM on page 319 UNIT GIMBalance on page 319 Parameters Limits The parameters are input or output as a list of ASCII values separated in the following order average CF error max CF error average symbol clock error max symbol clock error average offset maxi
7. 309 ANALYSIS A E 343 Status Registers wesc cssccccccsscssececcs cecceeds 346 Commands for 353 Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN 356 Annex ccs 361 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input 361 VQ Data File Format 368 List of Remote Commands 4 2 374 NAEK cane ee nS renee eee cre 383 SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 4 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This WLAN User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included ch
8. nete N E nnn nn 317 FETCh BURSEMGPOWSGEMINII E ue HE ROCHE TEX Fete YAN CNET de MES ais 317 FETCH BURSEPAY LOA et c er YE CREE P 317 FETCh BURSEPAYLoad MINIImUTTI unionis tat oma etate Rn e 317 FETCh BURSEPAYLoad AVERadge tio erret teet tere e ete eie draenei 317 FETCh BURSt PEAK MAXimum FETCH BURSEPEAK css sescsvtsncescaussss EXER Rea SERE RYE UNES AEREE 317 FETCHh BURSEPEAK AMERA9g6 streets eer eer eee V e VE PE dE eee XE ERES 317 FETGh BURSEPREamble MAXIMUM Ir eee RN ERE 317 2220 9 317 FETCh BURSEPREamble AVERAge 7 oerte ete reet ee ee epa s vede d d e re VON TNR 317 rre EO rc FE EE 318 FETCh BURSt QUADoffset MAXimum m FETCh BURSEQUADOffsebtMINImUETI s is ii oreet tp enr nere er v ERR RR RE Rd e ER 318 FETCH BURSERMS MAXIMUM hurt terere ere nanan re E Ern OR EO EO eam neces 318 FETCH BURSERMS
9. 246 Impedance REMOlE H 213 E ANAE 99 Importing VQ data eed data remote feci T M Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 111 Connector remote Coulblilig et Rege teer renes Coupling remote nre rennen Digital Baseband Interface settings e M Overload remote needs Settings une Signal parameters Source Configuration softkey Source connection errors i Source Radio frequency RF Inp t samiple rate m tees Displayed icm Input sample rate ISR e 361 Digital cece eit nc teret ink 111 Input sources Analog Baseband 0 reete 112 Digital 110 airs uro 9 Inter channel interference ICI 60 IP address OSP switchbox 135 J Joined RX Sync and Tracking 133 K Keys BW 1 939 LINES ine MKR FUNCT 2299 R N GONT binos Pese eeu 169 RUN SINGLE 169 SPAWN 93 L Level Track
10. Ea AEA E 231 INPut DPATh c 240 INPUEEATT STATO uicta eere ett neut kd b t d c D bl E pl e ete Pedo 240 INPutFILTer HPASSESTATe iii trt riter nene ir tr rhe 212 VG PHHNON 213 tien ener re teenies neers INPut GAIN VALue E INPut IQ BALanced STAT6 tren ntt ne tnter net nr repre i erp nete INPut IQ FULLscale AU TO rrr rere th E ERR RENE ESENTE pid duc INPUT cli dating INSTrument CREate DUPLicate INS Trume nt CRE ate REP INSTrument CRE ate NEW rh t INS mument DELCI INS LIST nanny vibes 199
11. 322 1 283 1 322 CAL Culate LIMIT OL GRAN CG 210 GAL Culatespnz coe cocer ax oerte ie A E E E ATINE AE ENTE 305 lt gt 11 lt gt 5 2 322 lt gt 1 lt gt lt gt 5 322 e e rss redis edic 323 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer ssb RESUIt sese 324 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X CAL Culate nasMARIKG SIM AN T 344 lt lt gt STA Te ah rre kr ttr rente rr tnra nn terr prede denn 344 GALGulatesn MSRA ALING SEIQW RE EH E Pe ERE E KR ERR iaa 284 GAL lt MSRACALINBEVALUe ccena sto rre E torch enti n SE He ER CO eek s eR EE ERE 284 GALGCulate n MSRA WINDowsn IMAL ciet tnn ett hen rne xa 285 GALGulate n STATistics RESUlt E 5 ret tnter rero ERR PR EE 326
12. 34 Gain Imbalance VS Calfief ra e e c ee 34 GROUP Delay E 35 Magnitude CaP en ER Id e 36 Phase Error 38 Phase TRACKING 38 0405959 ts 39 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays ee eas PROU EE 40 PWT 41 PVT Falling BOG Ee 42 Quad Emor vs 43 Result Summary 44 Result Summary 45 SIO Mel 47 Spectrum Fatessa L5 0L ELSE 50 This result display shows the measured and the reference signal in the time domain For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal and the y axis value represents the amplitude of the measured signal The reference signal is derived from the measured signal after frequency and time syn chronisation channel equalization and demodulation of the signal The equivalent time domain representation of the reference signal is calculated by reapplying all the impair ments that have been removed prior to demodulation T
13. ext t Tracking IEEE 802 118 g OFDM p Timing Emor sro ne POFAMCLENS scs aes iin d dcn eds 13 Traces QuieryingTesults c enata cot 22 Results remote cedent tea UD c merci etre 327 Tracking uomen crosstalk Level errors Phase drift PPIlots iiio 00 m Remote control iii ei iter 257 TIMIN OO S 140 260 Trigger Configuration 243 Configuration 123 Drop out time 128 Drop Out Time 286 External remote 248 Holdoff 87 129 Hysteresis 85 129 Measurements nda 84 rm c 85 128 Output sae 195 130 Slope ueteres 129 247 Synchronization M 87 Trigger level 128 PAULO essa TE 128 Auto f emote cna shade 247 External trigger remote cre 245 Power 246 IF Power 246 RF Power 247 1 SOURCE TS 125 POW6 fast bt austin on cius 126 DIGIC M 126 External ici ti eer 125 Eree IU 125 VO POW T
14. 2r rire rote on 307 lt gt 5 0 0000 0001 011111 308 SYSTem SEQWUIORDGE teret adia sears 308 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear GPIB ibcir
15. 208 10 4 1 Selecting a Measurement Selecting the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flat ness and Tolerance Any of the following commands can be used to return to the WLAN IQ measurement Each of these results are automatically determined when the WLAN IQ measurement is performed The selected measurement must be started explicitely see chapter 10 8 Starting a Measurement on page 304 lt 5 202 CONFigure BURSEAM EVM IMMediate 2 12 22 22 1 rti cet ttt 202 CONFigure BURSEAME PMEIMMBdiate 2 oet ccena ncc it iiie aiiai 203 CONFigure BURSt CONSt CCARrier IMMediate ccce 203 4 203 2 203 CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 204 204 4444 000000 tate nnn nnn 204 2 884404000 204 CONFigure BURSt PREamble IMMediate esee 204 5
16. Meas only the specified PSDU Modulation PPDU Format Long PPDU PSDU Modulation PLCP Preamble PLCP Header PSDU 144 bits 48 bits Variable 1 2 5 5 11 Mb s Long PPDU Format Fig 5 4 Demodulation settings for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS signals PPDU Format to measure PSDU Modulation to 149 ee ee e eee eee e eee tee te ot e eie eene ta 150 PSDU NMedillaligi eee oc Eo de De ce edere 150 PPDU Format to measure PSDU Modulation to use Defines which PPDU formats modulations are to be included in the analysis Depend ing on which standards the communicating devices are using different formats of PPDUS are available Thus you can restrict analysis to the supported formats Note The PPDU format determines the available channel bandwidths For details on supported PPDU formats modulations and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 Auto same type as first PPDU The format modulation of the first valid PPDU is detected and subse quent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same format Auto individually for each PPDU All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their format modulation Meas only Only PPDUs with the specified format or PSDUs with the specified modulation are analyzed WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Demod all as All PPDUS
17. SENS DEMO FORM BANA SYMB MIN Manual operation See Min Max No of Data Symbols on page 158 10 5 9 Limits The following commands are required to define the limits against which the individual parameter results are checked Principally the limits are defined in the WLAN 802 11 standards However you can change the limits for your own test cases and reset the limits to the standard values later Note that changing limits is currently only possible via remote control not manually via the user interface The commands required to retrieve the limit check results are described in chap ter 10 9 1 3 Limit Check Results on page 319 Useful commands for defining limits described elsewhere UNIT EVM on page 319 UNIT GIMBalance on page 319 Remote commands exclusive to defining limits CALGulateL IMIEBURSEDALL her rei eases Merial re chant e cnc rcd 281 CALOCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL AVERage esee 281 nnne nennen nnns 281 281 CALOulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA MAXimuUm eeeeeee eene nennen 281 282
18. roter pero a eek E KE EERE OY SEHE 313 corner rrr e e E FX ERE Pe OI DR CR EXTR 314 FETCh BURSEBERPIloEMAXIIUIm cccecsecsscassecisscysccncesd cates tnr hr iere a e Ferr EAE EXE 314 FETGRBBURSEBERPIIOEMIMNITUTE s iecore peer epo qoaa eme PEU eg rna EY EO TEETE USE UE SMS KY 314 FETCh BURSECFERTror AVERAQe certet tn ert der n er HR ERR ERR XA EXER ENTER ERE FETCh BURSt CFERror MAXimum FETCh BURSt CFERror MINimum FETCI BURSEGCOUNEALLS eret tret enne n nter tenere re ca e dep REX d YER ERE 310 rr pner enr rere ri ERR FEAR RR RAE PNE EN Pea 310 OE E EATA OE AIEE E TEETE ONET 314 FETCI BURSECPERrorMAXIEQUI citer epit retira ren E e ER ede e REX E de YER Rau 314 FETCh BURSHGCPER ror MINIMUIM ttn rennen tita e Poen ea rra cr ra he ea ped d HERR ES 314 FETCH BURSEGCRESE MAXIMUM m 314 FETCH BURSEGCRESEMINimUti erret trente 314 amp 314
19. 158 160 274 Length source remote oiii insenso 274 Length source iss ne M Peak list Evaluation Method 57 Peak vector error Measurementrange creto cir cra 161 Peak Vector EnO on eric rotate itd inda ie 21 Phase drift c Der ssec esee onam 61 cede 140 Tracking IEEE 802 11 g OFDM j p 62 Phase Error vs Preamble Isesult displays cct erecti dee ci hates 38 a testers 259 Phase Tracking Isesultdisplays Due 38 Pilot bit error rate coo tne eerte 13 Pilots for tracking tends 140 259 Polynomial degree AMAM iesirea 163 Ports External Mixer Remote control 221 Power Interval search eee 137 13 VISIT 32 vs time see PvT 40 41 42 Power interval search 2 257 Power normalize MIMO redo erts eras ho 155 Power sensors Trigger mode i t rne 127 PPDU BABbbreviationi x2 2 1 ete 66 Amount to analyze 158 160 276 Amount to analyze remote 275 Analysis mode 142 145 151 Analyzed gt oe dotate 11 80 Channel bandwidth 142 143 145
20. Dco CEN 166 Mixer Type External Mixet eC Pep Ceres 102 Modulation OFM ALS o m ens 81 Inverted I Q remote 242 Inverted I Q c eite teda 123 PPDU ste 143 144 150 269 PPDU remote ei 354 PRIUS c IUe 146 152 Modulation Accuracy Parameters 5 sedute desse 13 Modulation and Coding Scheme See MOS aye eta e e Hee 146 152 MSR ACLR Results remote serie ades 324 MSRA Analysis interval Operating mode RF measurements MSRA applications Capture offset ic cc aee ttd ee eene 137 Capture offset 285 MSRA Master Data Coverage tipeer tetra ti 89 Multiple Measurement channels 91 N Ness PPD JS prcnis n nsi ei dad 153 261 Nof SymbOls S Pam e sad 60 Noise Additive white Gaussian AWG 60 ifle E 82 114 Normalizing Power ee ein tatit tote 155 Nsts 5 2 ire aia 147 272 Number of samples DISplayed stc eem E nO ER EE 11 OBW Configuring applications 172 54 Occupied bandwidth OBW ce Q 54 Offset Amplification 17 19 Analysis
21. EEY 314 FETCHBURSECPERrO MINIMUM siz in san DR 314 FETGIEBURSECRESICAVERadS 2 nie tenente 314 eran ad d aao n duae pte 314 FETCh BURSECRESPMINImUI cicer edt s rave 314 FETCHIIBURSEEVMIABE AVERAGGT ire peine epp pie egre bae dee brit e pte RR guis 314 FETGITBURSCEEVMEALELMPADXIWIGIIG iu natn cca petat n eoa ae noa exa a cx aet 314 FETCHh BURSEEVMEIAEEMINIABINQN aiiis eere eost repre ceste vere edu ga ore asus vea d 314 FETCHBURSEEVM DATAVAVERGGQC ire eoi tr ott Se E eet REIR Rcs 315 1 0 02 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 seen 315 EETIGITBURSCEVMEIDATACMINIBUI cta 315 E ania 315 FETCh BURSt EVM DIRect MAXIMUM ccccccecceceeseceessteeesteecuteeeeesecaeeeeaeeeeaeeeegeteeaetees 315 FETCH BURSEEV ME DIRE GEM INIM 315 ipe eroe Eva Re ERR Re 315 FETGCh BURSEEVM PI
22. Fig 4 1 Block diagram for the R amp S FSW WLAN application using the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM standard In the lower part of the figure the subsequent digital signal processing is shown R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics a ee ee ee Packet search and timing detection In the first block the packet search is performed This block detects the Jong symbol LS and recovers the timing The coarse timing is detected first This search is imple mented in the time domain The algorithm is based on cyclic repetition within the LS after N 64 samples Numerous treatises exist on this subject e g 1 to 3 Furthermore a coarse estimate coarse of the Rx Tx frequency offset Af is derived from the metric 6 The hat generally indicates an estimate e g x is the estimate of x This can easily be understood because the phase of r i A r i is deter mined by the frequency offset As the frequency deviation Af can exceed half a bin distance between neighboring subcarriers the preceding short symbol SS is also analyzed in order to detect the ambiguity After the coarse timing calculation the time estimate is improved by the fine timing calculation This is achieved by first estimating the coarse frequency response AtS where k 26 26 denotes the channel index of the occupied subcarriers First the FFT of the LS is calculated After the FFT calculation the known symbol information of the LS subcar
23. antenna Spatial Space Time Transmit Receive Space Time Spatial Streams Streams Antennas Antennas Streams Streams y y Steam Spatial Spatial 3 Constellation Parser and d ops bs s Encoder with tad y Synchroni Decoder with Demapper Constellation Matrix Q zation and Matrix Q Demod gt Guard Decoder eee STBC Interval Y STBC STA Coded Modulation p y Qs s y Q Combiner Coded Bis Physical Channel Heny Bits Effective Channel He Heny Q R Hey y QS Herr S Fig 4 3 Data flow from the transmit antenna to the receive antenna DO SST User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 72 R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics 4 3 1 Space Time Block Coding STBC The coded bits to be transmitted are modulated to create a data stream referred to as a spatial stream by the stream parser in the transmitting device under test see fig ure 4 3 The Space Time Block Encoder STBC implements the transmit diversity technique see Basic technologies on page 72 It creates multiple copies of the data streams each encoded differently which can then be transmitted by a number of antennas To do so the STBC encodes only the data carriers in the spatial stream using a matrix Each row in the matrix represents an OFDM symbol and each column represents one antenna s transmissions over time thus the term
24. 205 89 205 GONFigure BURSEPVT IMMediale 2 eite rne nte ER RR 205 CONFigure BURSUPVT SEL6Gl etuer tht ene rhe trae beu ep ER ER nuances 205 CONFigure BURSt QUAD QCARrier IMMediate aces 206 CONFigure BURSEtSPECtrum FFT IMMediate eie rita tana 206 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness SELect creen retenue annt th het 206 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness IMMediate csse 207 CONFigure BURSEtSTATistics BSTReam IMMediate seen 207 1 4 207 lt gt 5 207 CONFigure BURSt AM AM IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be AM vs AM Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See on page 23 CONFigure BURSt AM EVM IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be AM vs EVM Results are only displayed after a measurement is execu
25. CRI Ext an tex eri 237 CONFigure POWerAUTOSWESbITIME tcu c en tetur tak v ee rg ertt ea 237 GONFigure POWerEXPeclediRF riot tris ir e ruo eie 238 lt gt lt gt 5 000011 238 lt gt lt gt 238 INPut ATTentlaliof gt ext eel alent ee adden 238 INPUDATT enuationtAW TO e 239 INPUEEATT iiti edt Roque irai ine el AA M 239 INP EAE TANTO doter eee breed etu Ee bte eor acta sedie Pede epe eps 240 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance INPUEEATTISTATB uiae petet idest a x 240 IN Put GAINEVALUG aedi ERE 240 ss cicada 241 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows regardless of the lt n gt suf fix Parameters lt Unit gt RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 119 CONFigure POWer AUTO lt Mode gt This command is used to switch on or off automatic p
26. Bitstream Constellation vs carrier eene 338 Constellation vs symbol 337 Data format remote 327 Evaluating retten seen c tr 174 EVM S 338 EFT Speci iioii ep tg oerte 340 Group delay cr eter teres 340 Magnitude Captut 0 nre reet 332 Numeric remote 2 meten erp ete td 309 PVT F llBUrst Ded 341 Result SUMMAR ec eerie 332 Retrieving remote 309 RE remote een eet e Pen ceed 322 Signal field tee ees 342 Spectrum Flatness n creen neca 342 Trace remote eerie tein 327 Trace data query remote 22 992 Updating the display 169 Updating the display 285 Retrieving Numeric results remote 309 Results remote RF Results remote Trace results remote RF attenuation m tuto FRE IN PUP e eas Connector remote Overload protection etes Overload protection 211 Er debe rte RF measurements ANAIYS S Configuration remote
27. 5 iecur ener dinners 5 1 2 Documentation 6 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene enn 7 2 Welcome to the WLAN 9 2 4 Starting the WLAN 10 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 10 3 Measurements and Result 13 3 1 WLAN I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 13 3 2 Frequency Sweep 4 2 0 51 A Measurement ca suas 58 4 1 Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 58 4 2 Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 65 43 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n 71 44 Channels and Carrlers ieieiee rire to na ne deneuneeeeterneneetteeseneceess 80 4 5 Recognized vs Analyzed 5 80 4 6 Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters
28. 319 UNI T GIMBAlareG a its oett aere exo uL dn ro 319 UNIT PRESIM nitidi Perret rodeo id decent ir 319 FETCh BURSt ALL This command returns all results from the default WLAN measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Retrieving Results see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 The results are output as a list of result strings separated by commas in ASCII format The results are output in the following order lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Return values lt Global Result gt lt Stream Results gt Manual operation lt preamble power gt lt payload power gt lt peak power gt lt min rms power gt lt avg rms power gt lt max rms power gt nan nan nan lt min freq error gt lt avg freq error gt lt max freq error gt lt min symbol error gt lt avg symbol error gt lt max symbol error gt lt min EVM all gt lt avg EVM all gt lt max EVM all gt lt min EVM data gt lt avg EVM data gt lt max EVM data gt lt min EVM pilots gt lt avg EVM pilots gt lt max EVM pilots gt nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan peak gt lt min rms power gt
29. 5 233 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 113 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut IO FULLscale LEVel on page 232 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 232 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the
30. ARE ERE 275 CONFigure WLAN RSYNc JOI N6d tton nt tnr tee ee pi n canine n ED RYE Den 256 CONFigure WLEAN SMAPping MONDE 5 ocn truth ree n a rh Re ER EY EE EE ROS 264 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping NORMAalise orar cotone tener ede nex pene eg ote AR vH YT EK 264 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping FXS ClI ctr ttr E rtr ER eee eee 264 lt gt 5 lt gt 265 CONFigure WLAN SMAPDping TX ch TIMeshift naar reir rnt retener re then mena tke 265 CONFigure WLAN STBO AUTO T YPE itte ern ttt nh re tri ne e net te i en ng 265 DIAGnostic SERVICE NSOUFGG ont n enr tern e eR EF EYES FER ER EHE REESE ROS 234 DISPlay dero OANE 288 DISPlayEWINDowsri7 SELGt on rtr tnr rennen erre creen 207 DBISPlayEWINDOW SnP SIZE rere mrt 289 BISPlayEWINBDowsn TABLe TEM itr are rt eo orent ep exea b CHEER C ene rea expe xix aerae as 296 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe AUTO esses 299 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 299 lt gt
31. Xx RUN eA SEU IR SR 276 SENSe BURSt SELect et a P Eee nied SENSe BURSESELecES TATe iced e ar UR REA CER RE XXX RE VR exe en ex ER e 276 SENS amp BURSESELEGGCES TATG iir a rever er RE Meer rec ns eae nae 328 SENSe GORR6ction CVE BAND i uitio Pee era tu Ea i ree e ERR 221 SENSe CORRSction GVE BIAS oer e qa n po sates ce ERR XR Ren a ve E Ver e no Y 222 SENSE CATALOG ara Seo ee Y EYE EGER dn 222 SENSe GORR6ction CVI CLEAR iroi e eee rrr er eo rre ete d ERE Feet e PIRE MES IE 222 SENSe CORREction CVE COMMMBnL sicot ne Eee PEE Rx En n ERR 223 SENSE GVIS eere use rac crure ttc eO RR P RF CER VET EE 223 SENSe GORRSction CVESHIARMORIG oues e ear re Eod ee y YEN E nee PERTH RENE 224 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs SENSe CORRection CVL SELect SENSe CORRection GVE SNUMBDSGLC siio rris aleve nae SENSe IDEMOG GES TitmatiOnkc ERR SENS DEMod F
32. 127 Power Sensor 127 127 128 Wro bleshiOOlirig me e tenen set ee 188 INPUT overload 211 U Units EVMiTeSUIES ert dee tin ocho 319 Gain imbalance results eene 319 PPDU length results Preamble results Reference level 5 2 ret tees Updating ISesult display 2 2 169 Result display remote esses 285 Usable bandwidth Definition User manuals User sample rate IDefinitilori rodent rete 361 WindowW title Dai eoe e d Per deri Cie en Pic dem 11 Windows Adding remote ect otro esent iocans 289 Closing remote 293 296 COMMUNI G P eO 95 Layout remote 294 Maximizing remote 289 Querying 292 293 Replacing 293 Splitting remote Types remote retento n eee WLAN cic tob ie cod Rente ie ri ed nube Measurements step by step ges Parameters Programming examples Remote control X mo rc escort P ee deca esas Y Y maximum Y minimum fele 166 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating 100 Activating Deactivating remote 213 2 Zooming Activating remot
33. Manual operation See MCS Index to use on page 146 SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex lt Index gt Defines the the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on their Nsts This command is only available for the IEEE 802 11 ac standard This command is available for DEM FORM NSTS MODE MEAS or DEM FORM NSTS MODE DEM see SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex MODE on page 272 Parameters Index Example SENS DEM FORM NSTS MODE MEAS SENS DEM FORM NSTS 1 Manual operation See Nsts on page 147 SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex MODE Mode Defines the the PPDUS taking part in the analysis depending on their Nsts This command is only available for the IEEE 802 11 ac standard Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Mode gt FBURst ALL MEASure DEMod FBURst The Nsts of the first PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same Nsts corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All recognized PPDUs are analyzed according to their individual Nsts corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MEASure Only PPDUs with the Nsts specified by SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex are analyzed DEMod The Nsts index specified by SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindexis used for all PPDUs RST FBURst Example SENS DEM FORM NSTS MODE MEAS SENS DEM FORM
34. p Rs 140 Complementary cumulative distribution function See CODE ien lena 55 Constellation rr ete retentus 27 vs carrier result display 29 vs carrier trace data is vs Symboli trace data one 337 Continue single sweep ctore eee 169 Continuous Sequencer oci 92 Continuous sweep eji eR 169 Conventions SCGPlcomiarids 5 2 ttt cte 192 Conversion loss External Mixer Remote control 220 Conversion loss tables 106 Available remote control 222 Band remote control 221 Bias remote Control 222 GOMPMQUIING ree 106 Creatirig re 107 Deleting remote control 2 222 External Mixer ses 442 103 External Mixer Remote control Harmonic order remote control wi 224 Importing External Mixer 107 MANAGING cesses tertinm tr nenne 105 Mixer type remote control 224 Saving External Mixer 24110 Selecting remote control 225 Shifting values External Mixer s 110 Values External Mixer 109 Copying Measurement channel 197
35. Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4 P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital or analo
36. re Pee tue eo prede 245 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower s TRIGger SEQuence LP EVel IEPOWSLE rci ir rn tret re ren ter rere th Fe EO TRIGger SEQuence HEV Cl IQROW EE casiccasssercctchecasspcencaasrecconcsyent eB ela en cce eb TRIGger SEQuerice ELEEVel REBPOWer ttt tetra e ERE TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt TRIGE SEQUENCE MODE TRIG ger SEQUENCE SLOBe ttr reet n e e nerd e ee ene AE TRIGger SEQuence SOURCGS nior rete E ehe ere oer a e TRIGger SEQUuerice TIME RINITGEVl ccce rana t ero et nett eei pena UNIT BURSt tase INT er UNIT GIMBalance s WNIT PRE GID Gives rrr Fera esee serre va decere cesta ar er vh ee Eoo tov er PEOR NS Index A Abbreviations Signal processing IEEE 802 11 g OFDM p 58 Aborting Sweep AC DC coupling ACLR Configuring cdma2000 ee 170 RESUS 52 Res lts temot vosi noissa 324 Activating WLAN measurements remote 197 Additive white Gaussian noise AWGN
37. 008 20 5 Figure 19 19 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission in the 5 GHz band IEEE 802 11mb D08 40M 5G IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 008 40 5 IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 20M 5G Figure 19 20 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel in the 5 GHz band IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 17 Transmit spectral mask for a 20 MHz channel AC D1 1 20 5 IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 40M 95G IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel AC D1 1 40 5 IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 80M 5G IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 19 Transmit spectral mask for a 80 MHz channel D1 180 5 Configuring the Result Display SENSe POWer SEM CLASs Index This command sets the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM power class index The index represents the power classes to be applied The index is directly related to the entries displayed in the power class drop down combo box within the SEM settings configura tion page Parameters Index RST 0 10 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The corresponding tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 2 Display Configuration on page 93 The suffix n in the following remote commands represents the window 1 16 in the currently sel
38. 1 2 um 1 2 1 4 Nused 1 2 OFDM Symbol 1 l4 4 4 OFDM Symbol 2 1 1 4 OFDM Symbol ly 4 10 9 4 7 10 9 4 8 10 9 4 9 10 9 4 10 Retrieving Results Constellation vs Carrier This measurement represents the complex constellation points as and Q data See for example IEEE Std 802 11 2012 Fig 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encoding Each and Q point is returned in floating point format Data is returned as a repeating array of interleaved and Q data in groups of Nuseq subcarri ers per OFDM Symbol until all the and Q data for the analyzed OFDM Symbols is exhausted Note that as opposed to the Constellation results the DC null subcarriers are included as NaNs Nusea pairs of and Q data per OFDM Symbol OFDM Symbol 1 1 1 Q4 4 142 042 11 Q1 Nusea OFDM Symbol 2 1 4 Qz 4 122 02 12 Q2 Nused OFDM Symbol N Qu 4 Qu 2 IN Nused Qu Nused Error vs Carrier Three trace types are provided for gain imbalance quadrature error evaluation TRACE1 The minimum gain imbalance quadrature error value over the analyzed PPDUS for each of the subcarriers TRACE2 The average gain imbalance quadrature error value over the analyzed PPDUs for each of the Ny seq subcarriers TRACE3 The maximum gain imbalance quadrature error value over the analyzed PP
39. _ 219 ISENS amp MIX LOSSHIGH 7 220 SENSe MIXenLOSS TABLE MIGH erani o ara edanan 220 5 5 086 0 2 44 4 220 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance ISBNSETMDSSELOSSDEBOM isses ter unteren Gut adl reta temen ade as eaten ees 220 SENSe MIXeEPOR TS uror torpe en eir enu AN 221 5 221 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 214 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 102 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on
40. index Q channel no time index 01101 0101101 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 11101 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 21101 0121101 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 01111 0101111 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 11111 0111111 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 21121 121 TE Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01121 0101121 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11121 Gti t2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21121 0121121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10oat32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands WLAN SENSE JADIUSEWENV Clty ie teer epi reet eee a oe va NUN TIR 283 SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE rna erar rh hae eoe ee p ne CARNE 266 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution FIL 242 ISENS amp BURSEGCOUNC to erret ae ER e eee e Wer s e Ep oe y Pede E ede 275 SENSe BURSEGCOUNESTATe i carere hte o i LUE eo EE
41. nennen menn nenne nenne nen nnne nnne 316 FETCh BURSEGEVMEALL AVERAUG rtu ette nte ente ee xad aa 317 FETCHh BURSEEVMEPALEIMAXIUITIUS ua eoe ed Eat oe Gea ger vo 317 FETGILBURSEEVMEALE MINIBOMITI iuro eia nr area T any Ren 317 317 FETCh BURSEMOPOWETMADXITDUEYI aia d duc rca ees 317 FETCHh BURSEMOPOwWeCMINIAIL aca soon c ur osea xe da 317 FETCHEBURStEPAY Load aaia Rhe pu t abe d enun 317 FETCHBURStPAY Load MINIMU da eit nez nee dente den reds 317 FETCHhB RSEPAYEoad MAXIMUM 5 T E M MPa 317 oer iae et Ec Ro ux ne e dear 317 FETCH BURSt PEAK MINIMUM 1 aerea pareat ma arae o hara adn n pa aao nha a nV anna dn nbn 317 FETCHIBURSUPEAK MAXIMUM ss Gg aae SY CY Eg ae kV Tre 12 se eek 317 FETGChBURSEPREamble AVERags 1 1 irte ett ehe oe 317 2 22 317 FETCH BURSEPREaMmBIE MAXIMUM sanserne E A RE 317 FETCH BURSEOUADOfiseEAV ERAGE cniri aiai Se
42. tenentes 135 Manual Sequential MIMO Data 135 L Singes OOM MPMERMOR RH 136 t RESUS wT 136 L Clear All Magnitude Capture 136 L RUN SGL RUN CONT uptalea suec mesi mthi aetate cea 136 DUT MIMO Configuration Defines the number of Tx antennas of the device under test DUT Currently up to eight Tx antennas are supported Remote command CONFigure WLAN DUTConfig page 254 MIMO Antenna Signal Capture Setup Defines the MIMO method used by the R amp S FSW s to capture data from multiple Tx antennas sent by one device under test DUT Simultaneous Simultaneous normal MIMO operation The number of Tx antennas set in DUT MIMO Configuration defines the number of analyzers required for this measurement setup Sequential Sequential using open switch platform using OSP A single analyzer and the Rohde amp Schwarz OSP Switch Platform Switch with at least one fitted R amp S OSP B101 option is required to mea sure the number of DUT Tx Antennas as defined in DUT MIMO Con figuration Sequential Sequential using manual operation manual A single analyzer is required to measure the number of DUT Tx Antennas as defined in DUT MIMO Configuration Data capturing is performed manually via the analyzer s user interface Remote command CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure TYPE on page
43. eee 81 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data 82 4 8 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters 84 4 9 Triggered 84 4 10 WLAN I Q Measurements in MSRA Operating 88 MEC 17 Mee 91 5 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 91 5 2 Display Configuration erret 93 5 3 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 93 5 4 Frequency Sweep 44 4 170 PNA SUS ic a ss he ae tts ee Leia ames 174 7 VQ 175 7 1 Import Export 5 4 2 eeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesenseaaeeaneeeeeeeeneees 175 SSS SSS EET User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 3 R amp S9FSW K91 Contents 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 A 1 A 2 How to Export and Import I Q 1 12112 176
44. 123 129 Carriers Frequency Phase angle Q Quadrature 18 19 Reference level 119 Options Bandwidth extension 361 362 Electronic attenuation 120 High pass filter 99 212 Preamplifef ret ene 121 OSP switch box Antenna connection 135 IP address a ei ee ce evita at 135 EIU 134 State es ree ert ere pr ned 135 Output COMMQUIATION 114 Configuration remote 234 Noise source 82 114 Parameters eter EU oreet dd 82 Sample rate definition 961 Settings eie tret et eee ere ndi 114 M 115 130 Overload RF INPUT 82 RE input cen temet 211 Overview Configuring WLAN measurements 94 P Packet search IEEE 802 11a 60 Parameters ec 84 82 OUTPUT 82 WLAN MR 13 Payload Channel estimation 139 258 Length a ote
45. 141 Channel Estimation Range Specifies the signal range used to estimate the channels This function is not available for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS Preamble The channel estimation is performed in the preamble as required in the standard Payload The channel estimation is performed in the preamble and the pay load The EVM results can be calculated more accurately Remote command SENSe DEMod CESTimation on page 258 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Phase Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are compensated for phase drifts on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking PHASe on page 259 Timing Error Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation for timing drift If activated the measure ment results are compensated for timing error on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking TIME on page 260 Level Error Gain Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation for level drifts within a single PPDU If acti vated the measurement results are compensated for level error on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking LEVel on page 259 Mismatch Compensation Activates or deactivates the compensation for I Q mismatch If activated the measurement results are compensated for gain imbalance and quadra ture offset Since the quadrature offset is com
46. 250 OUTPUETRIGGEr ponte WEY 251 OUTPut TRIGgersport OTYPBe arr rri ener ere eer een rrt rne ten ever t teeta ates 251 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMedi te 2 tret tene terere t rt nons 252 OUTPut TislGgersport PULSe bENGI creer ES geret oa opens 252 SENSe TRACking CROSstalk SENSE TRACKING IQMGOMP sv SENS eE SENSe TRACKing PASS deinen a rA a TEA SENSe TRACking PlLots I WEIednHllc STAT s OPERation CONDILtiOI orto tert e cry 352 STAT S OPERatio ENABIe iis exter receta reri ea trt er e Ma WEE 352 STATUS M esasan aniei gis ep Rex e E RIEN 353 STATuUs OPERatior PTRASIUOR Pede tp rette 353 STATUS OPERation EVENU D ben ere plex anak Ei EAEEREN 351 STATUS PRESET 351 STATus QUEStionable ACPL mit CONDition 352 5 lt 1 4 2 20 2000000
47. M 123 Suppressing Filter out Adjacent Channels IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j n p 123 Input Sample Rate This is the sample rate the R amp S FSW WLAN application expects the input data to have If necessary the R amp S FSW has to resample the data During data processing in the R amp S FSW the sample rate usually changes decrea ses The RF input is captured by the R amp S FSW using a high sample rate and is resampled before it is processed by the R amp S FSW WLAN application Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 243 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 242 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA
48. Rae Ie 259 SENSE TRACKING PHAS Cac te iia Cosa dero teer estu 259 SENSE TRACKMO PILOS a e aa e A aa a Aa AETA 259 SENSE TRACKING MME ersinnen aiaa pear ee pt aa Oaar aiaia 260 SENSe see also 5 260 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe DEMod CESTimation lt State gt This command defines whether channel estimation will be done in preamble and pay load or only in preamble The effect of this is most noticeable for the EVM measure ment results where the results will be improved when this feature is enabled However this functionality is not supported by the IEEE 802 11 standard and must be disabled if the results are to be measured strictly according to the standard Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON The channel estimation is performed in the preamble and the payload The EVM results can be calculated more accurately OFF The channel estimation is performed in the preamble as required in the standard RST OFF Manual operation See Channel Estimation Range on page 139 SENSe TRACking CROSstalk State Activates or deactivates the compensation for crosstalk between MIMO carriers This command is only available for standard IEEE 802 11ac or n MIMO Parameters State ON OFF RST
49. ra dca 51 3 1 WLAN I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flat ness and Tolerance The default WLAN I Q measurement captures the I Q data from the WLAN signal using a nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large bandwidth The data captured with this filter includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FSW WLAN application to demodulate broadband signals and determine various character istic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy spectrum flatness center fre quency tolerance and symbol clock tolerance in just one measurement Other parameters specified in the WLAN 802 11 standard require a better signal to noise level or a smaller bandwidth filter than the measurement provides and must be determined in separate measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Mea surements on page 51 e Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 13 e Evaluation Methods for WLAN IQ 22 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters The default WLAN measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness captures the data from the WLAN signal and determines all the following parameters a single sweep Table 3 1 WLAN I Q parameters for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j n p Parameter Description General measurement parameters
50. Lk N FFT 4 1 with the modulation dependant normalization factor SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 60 Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p the symbol of subcarrier at symbol the gain at the symbol in relation to the reference gain g 1 at the long symbol LS Hy the channel frequency response at the long symbol LS phase mmo the common phase drift phase of all subcarriers at symbol see Common phase drift phase in the phase of subcarrier k at symbol caused by the timing drift see Common phase drift the independent Gaussian distributed noise samples Phase drift and frequency deviation The common phase drift in FFT is given by phase 2 rest Txl dy Common phase drift 4 2 with 80 the number of Nyquist samples of the symbol period N 64 the number of Nyquist samples of the useful part of the symbol A frest the not yet compensated frequency deviation the phase jitter at the symbol In general the coarse frequency estimate Af see figure 4 1 is not error free Therefore the remaining frequency error represents the frequency deviation in not yet compensated Consequently the overall frequency deviation of the device under test DUT is calculated by Af coarse The common phase dri
51. Sample Rate Fs Input sample rate PPDU Type of analyzed PPDUs MCS Index Modulation and Coding Scheme MCS index of the analyzed PPDUs Data Rate Data rate used for analysis of the signal IEEE 802 11A ONLY the limits can be changed via remote control not manually see chapter 10 5 9 Limits on page 280 in this case the currently defined limits are displayed here WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameter Description Gl Guard interval length for current measurement Standard Selected WLAN measurement standard Meas Setup Number of Transmitter Tx and Receiver Rx channels used in the measure ment Capture time Duration of signal capture No of Samples Number of samples captured No of Data Symbols The minimum and maximum number of data symbols that a PPDU may have if it is to be considered in results analysis Analyzed PPDUs For statistical evaluation of PPDUs see PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 lt x gt PPDUs of totally required lt y gt PPDUs have been analyzed so far lt z gt indicates the number of analyzed PPDUs in the most recent sweep Number of recognized Number of PPDUs recognized in capture buffer PPDUs global Number of analyzed Number of analyzed PPDUs in capture buffer PPDUs global Number of analyzed Number of PPDUs analyzed in entire signal if available PPDUS in physical chan nel
52. TX and Rx carrier parameters offset dB Transmitter center frequency leakage relative to the total Tx channel power see chapter 3 1 1 1 Offset on page 17 Gain imbalance dB Amplification of the quadrature phase component of the signal relative to the amplification of the in phase component see chapter 3 1 1 2 Gain Imbal ance on page 17 Quadrature offset Deviation of the quadrature phase angle from the ideal 90 see chap ter 3 1 1 3 Quadrature Offset on page 18 skew s Delay of the transmission of the data on the path compared to the Q path see chapter 3 1 1 4 Skew on page 19 PPDU power dBm Mean PPDU power Crest factor dB The ratio of the peak power to the mean power of the signal also called Peak to Average Power Ratio PAPR MIMO Cross Power dB Center frequency error Frequency error between the signal and the current center frequency of the Hz R amp S FSW the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indica ted The absolute frequency error includes the frequency error of the R amp S FSW and that of the DUT If possible the transmitterR amp S FSW and the DUT should be synchronized using an external reference See R amp S FSW User Manual gt Instrument setup gt External reference the limits can be changed via remote control not manually see chapter 10 5 9 Limits on page 280 in this case the curre
53. Blue colored arrows represent the connections between the Tx antennas of the DUT and the corresponding SMA plugs of the R amp S OSP B101 option Green colored arrows represent auxiliary connections of SMA plugs of the R amp S OSP B101 option Yellow colored arrows represent the connection between the SMA plug of the R amp SGOSP B101 option with the RF or analog baseband input of the analyzer OSP IP Address Sequential Using OSP Switch Setup The analyzer and the R amp S OSP switch platform have to be connected via LAN Enter the IP address of the OSP switch platform When using an R amp SGOSP130 switch platform the IP address is shown in the front dis play When using a R amp S OSP120 switch platform connect an external monitor to get the IP address or use the default IP address of the OSP switch platform For details read the OSP operation manual An online keyboard is displayed to enter the address in dotted IPV4 format Tip the LED symbol indicates the state of the OSP switch box Color State gray OSP switch box off or IP address not available valid red OSP switch box on and IP address valid but not accessible green OSP switch box on and IP address accessible Remote command CONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP ADDRess on page 255 OSP Switch Bank Configuration Sequential Using OSP Switch Setup The R amp SGOSP B101 option is fitted in one of the three module slots switch banks at the rear of the OSP
54. Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are Activating WLAN Measurements transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Activating WLAN Measurements WLAN measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K91 The measurement is started immediately with the default settings o These are basic R amp S FSW commands listed here for your convenience INSTramentoREate DUPLIGale idee e e neto tee ener ett erede 197 INSTr ment CREateEN
55. Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVCH See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt EVM ECHip IMMediate on page 204 CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate on page 204 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 11 EVM vs Chip on page 339 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows all EVM values calculated on a per carrier basis over the number of analyzed PPDUs as defined by the Evaluation Range gt Statistics settings see PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 The Tracking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied see chapter 5 3 7 Tracking and Channel Estimation on page 138 The MinHold Maxhold and Aver age traces are displayed ER User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 31 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 2 EVM vs Symbol 1 Mine 2 Mae Symb 1 595 2 Symb Symb 5952 2 EVM vs Symbol Stream 1 4 Stream 1 Stream2 Stream3 Stream 4 2 1 Stream 1 2 2 Stream 2 Symb 1 35 2 Symb Symb 352 Symb 1 35 2 Symb 2 3 Stream 3 2 4 Stream 4 92 Symb 1 35 2 Symb Fig 3 13 EVM vs symbol result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVSY see out ADD WINDow on page 289 or NFigure BURSt te on page 204 Querying results 4 DATA see chap
56. 116 WOIPOWGR E 127 EE M 176 Input Source Config 2 97 IQ Export 176 p 176 Outputs CONG ettet en 114 Power SOMSOF 127 121 Ref Level emeret 119 boi 169 Repetition interval sinirinin aiai 128 RESUIPGOMIG i cm entre te neg 161 RF Attefhi Auto inc nter trenta terrere 120 RF Atten Manual wis 120 RF Power 22427 iT e U rpe aee 92 Signal 121 Signal Description iiie 95 Single Sequencer Pede 92 Single Sweep xa 169 Sweep Config 168 TIME rte 128 Trigger Config 123 Trigger Offset i 128 Space Time Block Coding See STBG ene ede tuna 147 153 SPACETIME SIr amp almi eie rere ee 74 Span EL 93 Spatial mapping mode lom User defined MIMO Specifics for Configuration ertet rentrer ri 95 Spectrum Emission Mask 586 nod eiue 53 Spectrum Flatness Parameters 2 Hu gat 13 Result display Trace IANA mE Ne Standard see Digital standard nete 11 Standard WLAN measurements 13 Starting WLAN applicat
57. 150 Demodulation MIMO IEEE 802 118 1 rne tert teas 154 5 3 8 1 Demodulation IEEE 802 11a OFDM j p The following settings are available for demodulation of IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p signals WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance mm Demodulation PDUs to Analyze PSDU Modulation Coded OF DM BPSK 1 2 Rate is indicated in Signah Guard Interval Length 16 samples Fig 5 2 Demodulation settings for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j or p standard PPDU Analysis T EEEE TE ENES 142 6 2 520204 EARE ia 142 Channel Bandwidth to measure 143 PSDU Modulation nonesa etn eer ea e ee ebd e d tr de 143 PSDU Modulstioh aec ed d ed n Pene 144 PPDU Analysis Mode Defines whether all or only specific PPDUS are to be analyzed Auto same type as first PPDU The signal symbol field i e the PLCP header field of the first recog nized PPDU is analyzed to determine the details of the PPDU All PPDUS identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed All subsequent settings are set to Auto mode Auto individually for each PPDU All PPDUs are analyzed User defined User defined settings define which PP
58. Parameters lt Value gt Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO HYST UPP UPP 20 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh lt NoMeas gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh lt NoMeas gt For automatic scaling based on memory this value defines the number lt x gt of previous results to be considered when determining if rescaling is required The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement For details see Auto Mode on page 165 Parameters lt NoMeas gt integer value Number of measurement results to be stored for autoscaling Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO MEM DEPT 16 Manual operation See Memory Depth on page 167 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO MODE lt AutoMode gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MODE lt AutoMode gt This command determines which algorithm is used to determine whether the x axis or y axis requires automatic rescaling Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt AutoMode gt HYSTeresis If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measure ment exceed a specific value range hysteresis interval the ax
59. SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN Duration For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS signals only If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal command is set to true then this command specifies the exact duration required for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the minimum duration required for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis Parameters lt Duration gt RST 1 Default unit us Manual operation See Min Max Payload Length on page 160 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal State For IEEE 802 11a OFDM j n p signals only If enabled only PPDUs with a specific number of symbols are considered for mea surement analysis If disabled only PPDUs whose length is within a specified range are considered The number of symbols is specified by the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN command A range of data symbols is defined as a minimum and maximum number of symbols the payload may contain see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX on page 279 and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN on page 280 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Equal PPDU Length on page 158 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYM
60. Trigger level Fig 4 7 Effects of the trigger hysteresis 4 9 3 Triggered Measurements See Hysteresis on page 129 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occassional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out time Defining a dropout time helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events vy T M Drop Out Fig 4 8 Effect of the trigger drop out time See Drop Out Time on page 128 Drop out times for falling edge triggers If a trigger is set to a falling edge Slope Falling see Slope on page 129 the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level This is useful for example to trigger at the end of a burst similar to triggering on the rising edge for the beginning of a burst If a drop out time is defined the power level must remain below the trigger level at least for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Y v T Drop Out Fig 4 9 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a dro
61. e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword D VV User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 193 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 2 6 Introdu
62. gt 280 CONFigure BURSt PVT AVERage lt Value gt Defines the number of samples used to adjust the length of the smoothing filter for PVT measurement This command is only available for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS standards Parameters lt Value gt Manual operation See PVT Average Length on page 160 CONFigure BURSt PVT RPOWer lt Mode gt This remote control command configures the use of either mean or maximum PPDU power as a reference power for the 802 11b g DSSS PVT measurement Parameters lt Mode gt MEAN MAXimum Manual operation See Reference Power on page 161 CONFigure WLAN PAYLoad LENGth SRC Source Defines which payload length is used to determine the minimum or maximum number of required data symbols IEEE 802 11n ac Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Source gt ESTimate HTSignal ESTimate Uses a length estimated from the input signal HTSignal IEEE811 02 n Determines the length of the HT signal from the signal field LSIGnal IEEE811 02 ac Determines the length of the L signal from the signal field Manual operation See Source of Payload Length on page 158 CONFigure WLAN PVERror MRANge Range This remote control command queries whether the Peak Vector Error results are calcu lated over the complete PPDU or just over the PSDU This command is supported for 802 11b and 802 11g DSS
63. ueg 14 uoneuins3 J8jJlJ 19A19203 uoneuins3 uoneuins3 5214 1 I T I 19 duiesey 2 eseug bay ZHP S Jeyngejduies sisunguoueeg jeu amp is 4ayng eunjdeo OJ 1940 SIS JBUy8Jd Fig 4 2 Signal processing for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS signals Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Once the the normalized and undisturbed reference signal is available the transmit antenna baseband filter Tx filter is estimated by minimizing the cost function of a maximum likelinood based estimator N 1 _ Eu 2 E 2 j H H L r v xe _ V b i x s v i 0 jOg v 0 i L transmit antenna baseband filter Tx filter estimation 4 9 where r v the oversampled measurement signal S the normalized oversampled power of the undisturbed reference signal the observation length L the filter length Afv the variation parameters of the frequency offset the variation parameters of the phase offset 0 Og the variation parameters of the IQ offset h i the coefficients of the transmitter filter 4 2 2 Calculation of Signal Parameters The frequency offset the phase offset and the IQ offset are estimated jointly with the coefficients of the transmit filter to increase the estimation quality Once the transmit filter is known all o
64. 253 lt gt 253 5 5 5 253 CONFigure WLAN ANTMatri STATesantenna ueeiue eerte rtt nnt rte rrt etae tina Ege pennae ao 254 CONFigure WLAN DUT Gorifig neret sai eee 254 CONFigure WLAN EXTensiori AUTO TYPE ncici rnnt herein rere RR EE 261 GONFigure WEAN GTIMS A TO ecco tert tee ne ngo geret paren pue gena eme eu verb coa ERAN ERR 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIM amp AUTO TYPE tit reor tr rrr eet th rrr rrt nr tex C Renan 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe SELect CONFigure WEAN MIMO GAP TUFe scare tenue ale b re Arr ETENEE CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAP Ture B FFer etn etn rere tener tren dee 255 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAP T te tereti 255 CONFigure WEAN MIMO OSP ADD HRGSS score RENS EREMO REEIES FASSUS SX EFE SET eB ege 255 CONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP MODUle iita rn peer tn eet e n n ern dus 256 CONFigure WLAN PAYLoad LENGth S RO nnne rr three roe en AT 274 GONFigure WEAN PVERrOGMERANGgSS rcxs sarete petri ra exert her ER MEE
65. AMPM 335 R 335 LEE BUSES 0 ELT D DD 335 e CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function 336 EINEN A Be PRSE KI 337 e Constellation VS 2222 2 02011 1 nananana 338 LEM 30 338 ENO vs Preamble ertt 338 EVM VS Carie vases tee m 338 6 rito e 339 e EVM Vs Symbol a raaa ana 339 LEE zio ei 340 LC 015 Em 340 e Magnitude Captures eie eret iere cecidere ke dede EEEN 341 e Phase 511 GENERAR dM ena 341 JPOWerVs Time 341 2 342 e Spectrum 342 For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal and the y axis value represents the amplitude of the measured signal Note The measured signal and reference signal are complex signals AM PM For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal The y axis value represents the angle difference of the measured signal minus the ref erence
66. Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v How to Export and Import Data 4 Drag the parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for WLAN Signals 8 How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform measurements in the R amp S FSW WLAN application The following tasks are described 8 1 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for WEAN ESL 179 How to Analyze WLAN Signals in a MIMO Measurement 181 How to Determine OBW SEM ACLR CCDF for WLAN Signals 186 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for WLAN Signals 10 Press the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications cur
67. IDEMOG FORMAESIGSYymbOlL riter ere eret LR REF eve 273 SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONltent AUTO i icit neto nee beer a ep s 271 257 SENSe FREQ ncY GENT LE 3 rtr coi ener rer ti ceu aea BAR blanca 234 SENS FREQuency CENTOE STEP niet ie P tn b d c aes 235 SENSe EREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO riscontro aed eate Ea cu ux EL Sd 235 SENSe FREQ USNCY OEESGOL rane oett nip End a E Eee PERTH Aenean 236 SENS e MIX6r BIAS HIGLEL aiit ttt eR va e E Potete ceu t HER s Dette dgio ets 215 cia eod it cutie toot d e bas Oa e cuta did 215 SENSe MIXer FREQuenCY IAN DOVBE ioi ite ti ro rei RNC 217 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt iere E snes ERR SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue SENSe MIXerHARMonicHIGEES TA TO iio bn i N 5 2 SENSe IMIXer HARMoOrio EY PE ttn ertet pee r
68. esee nennen nnne resistentes 117 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 235 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measure
69. 15 Return to the Signal Capture gt MIMO Capture dialog box tab to perform the measurement a Connect the input for the first Tx antenna to the RF input of the R amp S FSW b Select the Single or Cont button for the RX 1 capture buffer to perform a single or continuous measurement for that antenna For a continuous measure ment select the Cont button again to stop the measurement c Connect the input for the second Tx antenna to the RF input of the R amp S FSW d Select the Single Cont button for the RX 2 capture buffer e If necessary repeat these steps for the third and fourth antennas f Select Calc Results to determine the results for each individual data stream in the selected result displays Note Instead of selecting the Single Cont button in the Signal Capture dia log box for each individual antenna capture which requires keeping the dialog box open you can press the RUN SINGLE or RUN CONT key to perform the measure ments The data is evaluated and the result displays are updated when the mea surement is stopped However in this case the data is written to the same capture buffer for all antennas namely the one selected for lt RUNS SINGLE or RUN CONT gt updates in the MIMO Capture tab Thus the assignment of the individual data streams to antennas is no longer visible in the result displays To perform an automated sequential measurement with an OSP switch box Thi
70. STATe on page 214 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 105 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 214 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 105 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 104 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt State gt OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 104
71. See Magnitude Capture on page 36 See Phase Error vs Preamble on page 38 See Phase Tracking on page 38 See PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b g DSSS on page 39 See PvT Full PPDU on page 40 See PvT Rising Edge on page 41 See PvT Falling Edge on page 42 See Quad Error vs Carrier on page 43 See Signal Field on page 47 See Spectrum Flatness on page 50 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 53 Table 10 13 Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter For I Q data traces the results depend on the evaluation method window type selected for the current window see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 The results for the various window types are descri bed in chapter 10 9 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 332 For RF data traces the trace data consists of a list of 1001 power levels that have been measured The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set For SEM measurements the x values should be queried as well as they are not equi distant see TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 331 Retrieving Results Table 10 14 Return values for LIST parameter This parameter is only available for SEM measurements For each sweep list range you have defined range 1 n the command returns eight values in the follow ing order lt No gt lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt lt RBW gt lt PeakFreq gt lt PowerAbs gt lt PowerRel gt lt
72. lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode 10 10 2 2 Using the Multiple Zoom lt gt lt 2 gt 00 0 2 0 000 0000 346 lt gt 200 lt gt 346 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 345 R amp S FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements lt lt _ ee m s DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm Span 25 0 MHz CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom
73. 13 At this point of the signal processing all unknown signal parameters such as timing off set frequency offset phase offset offset and gain imbalance have been evaluated and the measurement signal can be corrected accordingly Error vector magnitude EVM R amp S FSW method Using the corrected measurement signal r v and the estimated reference signal 8 the modulation quality parameters can be calculated The mean error vector magnitude EVM is the quotient of the root mean square values of the error signal power and the reference signal power EVM 0 o v 0 Mean error vector magnitude EVM 4 14 Whereas the symbol error vector magnitude is the momentary error signal magnitude normalized by the root mean square value of the reference signal power Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 80 12 sf Error vector magnitude EVM IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS method Symbol error vector magnitude 4 15 In 2 a different algorithm is proposed to calculate the error vector magnitude In a first step the IQ offset in the I branch and the IQ offset of the Q branch are estimated sepa rately LY offset I branch 4 16 1 1 o v 0 offset Q branch 4 17 where r v is the measurement signal which has been corrected with the estimates of the timing o
74. Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating WLAN Measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Parameter 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the defa
75. CAPTure OFFSet on page 285 Swap Activates or deactivates the inverted modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 242 Suppressing Filter out Adjacent Channels IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p If activated default only the useful signal is analyzed all signal data in adjacent chan nels is removed by the filter This setting improves the signal to noise ratio and thus the EVM results for signals with strong or a large number of adjacent channels However for some measurements information on the effects of adjacent channels on the measured signal may be of interest Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution FILTer STATe on page 242 5 3 4 2 Trigger Settings Access Overview gt Signal Capture gt Trigger Source Trigger settings determine when the R amp S FSW starts to capture the input signal R amp S FSW K91 Configuration Signal Capture Trigger Source Trigger In Out MIMO Capture Trigger Source Freerun gt FS Z11 Trigger Connection Guideline for Trigger Unit FS Z11 Level Mode DUT Master Analyzer RF OUTPUT 1 INPUT NOISE SOURCE Trigger Level RF OUTPUT 2 TRIGGER INPUT RF OUTPUT 3 Slave Analyzer 1 RF
76. Coupling lip t TEMOLE i rre o rere 212 Crest Factor 13 Crosstalk MIMO ince lene ce ee D eile 258 D Data acquisition Manual MIMO tertie 135 136 MIMO capture method ott e irte 132 MIMO SettDgs s ict eee ottima t 131 MSRA see Signal capturing ir rhone 121 Data format REMOTE conces x eta ct cia Etui Rea 327 Data input sies 97 Data streams acetone tintas 156 Data symbols Estimating IEEE 802 11a OFDM j 63 Number o tos SR au es Number of displayed 22 oro e noe td ettet DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 233 Demodulation BASICS sitiens Ur voice rii HE ns Date ka Er Bere Configuring remote Dependencies sshnsds aons mininainen Parameters os mannion maiad aE Settings MIMO Diagram TOOtGr uico coii boi ret eb re ote ra S Diagrams Evaluation method coire ee entro e qas 56 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 231 Analog Baseband B71 113 Digital Baseband Interface Input SSNS ec ect ei ester cle da Input status remote Status registels
77. DEMod FORMat MCSindex Index This command specifies the MCS index which controls the data rate modulation and streams for IEEE 802 11n ac standards only see document IEEE 802 11n D11 0 June 2009 This command is required if SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex MODE is set to MEAS DEM Parameters Index RST 1 Example SENS DEM FORM MCS MODE MEAS SENS DEM FORM MCS 1 Manual operation See MCS Index on page 147 SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex MODE Mode This command defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on their Modu lation and Coding Scheme MCS index for IEEE 802 11n ac standards only Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Mode gt FBURst ALL MEASure DEMod FBURst The MCS index of the first PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUS are analyzed only if they have the same MCS index corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All recognized PPDUS are analyzed according to their individual MCS indexes corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MEASure Only PPDUs with an MCS index which matches that specified by SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex are analyzed DEMod All PPDUs will be analyzed according to the MCS index speci fied by SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex RST FBURst Example SENS DEM FORM MCS MODE MEAS SENS DEM FORM MCS 1
78. Example POW SEM ETSI Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on WLAN Signals Table 10 8 Supported IEEE standards Manual operation IEEE 802 11n 2009 20M 2 4G The spectrum emission mask measurement is performed according to the standard IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission Parameter value IEEE or 2009 20 2 4 IEEE 802 11n 2009 40M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel 2009 40 2 4 IEEE 802 11n 2009 20M 5G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission 2009 20 5 IEEE 802 11n 2009 40M 5G IEEE 802 11mb D08 20M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 Figure 19 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission in the 2 4 GHz band 2009 40 5 D08 20 2 4 IEEE 802 11mb D08 40M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 Figure 19 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel in the 2 4 GHz band D08 40 2 4 IEEE 802 11mb D08 20M 5G IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011
79. For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The channel bandwidth of the first valid PPDU is detected and subse quent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same channel band width Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their channel bandwidth Meas only signal M Only PPDUs with the specified channel bandwidth are analyzed Demod all signal D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified channel bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE on page 266 MCS Index to use Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on their Modulation and Cod ing Scheme MCS index Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using the MCS index identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only the specified MCS M Only PPDUs with the MCS index specified for the MCS Index setting are analyzed D
80. IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display in window 2 to be ACPR adjacent channel power relative Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Channel Power ACLR on page 52 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum MASK IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display in window 2 to be Spectrum Mask Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 53 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum OBWidth IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display in window 2 to be ACPR adjacent channel power relative Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Occupied Bandwidth on page 54 10 5 10 5 1 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance CONFigure BURSt STATistics C CDF IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display in window 2 to be CCDF conditional cumulative distribution function Results are only displayed after a mea surement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See CCDF on page 55 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measu
81. If the EVM value is dominated by Gaussian noise this method yields similar results as Cost function for signal parameters The EVM vs Symbol result display shows two traces each using a different calculation method so you can easily compare the results see EVM vs Symbol on page 31 Literature on the IEEE 802 11b Standard 1 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Part 11 Wireless LAN Medium Access Control MAC and Physical Layer PHY specifications IEEE Std 802 11 1999 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc 1999 2 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Part 11 Wireless LAN Medium Access Control MAC and Physical Layer PHY specifications Higher Speed Physical Layer Extensions in the 2 4 GHz Band IEEE Std 802 11b 1999 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc 1999 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n For measurements according to the IEEE 802 11a b g standards only a single trans mit antenna and a single receive antenna are required SISO single in single out For measurements according to the IEEE 802 11ac or n standard the R amp S FSW can measure multiple data streams between multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas MIMO multiple in multiple out As opposed to other Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers in the R amp S FSW WLAN application MIMO is not selected as a specific stand
82. MINIMUM 8s FERRE R TF YR UE NS Ee PUR ETE ENS CERE SURE TS TENE 318 FETCI BURSERMSEAVERA98 s tc eee rtr petere verte e nerd ee Er rere anaes 318 FETGh B RSES ARI cei UEM X Ma e E He Ec e EE AERE EET 310 FETGRBURSESYMBolenmorAVERSQeTt ea scrotum XXe e EENEN 318 FETCR BURSCSYMBolerrorMAXImU occi ren tert Detective prec c per ete ce eqs 318 FETCh BURSESYMBolenror MINIMUM secco cie rtr ett re E Ere eb e d 318 FETCh BURSEFFALEAVERQG coenae Eep X NS REY ERR CER EE SEFERE 318 FETCh BURSEtTFALEMAXITQU retirer tnra estet eret peter Prep ete adn eR 318 FETCh BURSETRISe AVERG3A9gS67 e onere rtr t encan aipa AME UNES savers GE FEY EUER ERR FAY eee 319 ray xen et er vede dpt e ee deve peg Rec pee ree E 319 FETGHI B RSETRISe MINITUEE a eer Ye Sore ree eee FERRE DO P Ren 319 FETCH SYMBOL GOUNE 310 iesu HB 327 INITiate lt n gt CONTINUOUS ray ein badging 305 INITiate lt n gt REF
83. Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PSDUs are analyzed Meas only the specified PSDU Modulation M Only PSDUs with the modulation specified by the PSDU Modulation setting are analyzed Demod all with specified PSDU modulation D The PSDU modulation of the PSDU Modulation setting is used for all PSDUs Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat 1 AUTO TYPE on page 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 PSDU Modulation If analysis is restricted to PSDU with a particular modulation type this setting defines which type For details on supported modulation depending on the standard see table 4 1 Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 Demodulation IEEE 802 11ac The following settings are available for demodulation of IEEE 802 11ac signals IL Demodulation Analyze PPDU Analysis Mode Auto same type as first PPDU for each property to analyze PPDU Format to measure Auto same type as first PPDU 5 Channel Bandwidth to measure Auto same type as first PPDU up to CBW160 MHz MCS Index to use Auto same type as first PPDU MCS Index Nsts to use Auto same type as first PPDU gt Nsts STBC Field Auto same type as first PPDU Data Rate Mb s Modulation 0 0 800ns 400ns GI QPSK 1 2 2 234 8 468 58 5 65 Guard Interval Length Fig 5 3 Demodulation settings fo
84. OFF Example SENS TRAC CROS ON Manual operation See Compensate Crosstalk MIMO only on page 141 SENSe TRACking IQMComp State Activates or deactivates the compensation for I Q mismatch gain imbalance quadra ture offset skew see chapter 3 1 1 5 Mismatch on page 19 This setting is not available for standards IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS Parameters State ON OFF ON Compensation for gain imbalance quadrature offset and skew impairments is applied OFF Compensation is not applied this setting is required for mea surements strictly according to the IEEE 802 11 2012 IEEE 802 11ac 2013 WLAN standard RST OFF Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example SENS TRAC IQMC ON Manual operation See Q Mismatch Compensation on page 140 SENSe TRACking LEVel lt State gt Activates or deactivates the compensation for level variations within a single PPDU If activated the measurement results are compensated for level error on a per symbol basis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS TRAC LEV ON Manual operation See Level Error Gain Tracking on page 140 SENSe TRACking PHASe lt State gt Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are compensated for phase drifts on a per symbol basis Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1
85. Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table New Table Edit Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings gt Band amie FS 760 Harmonic 6 S N 123 4567 Position 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz NI Bs Mixer INIME 109 109 Mixer Im 109 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 222000 109 Jac 109 Delete 109 e a eddie aic Gite re Fa eva a 110 Su TEE 110 icc RR O 110 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument
86. PPDU Format to measure Defines which PPDU formats are to be included in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different formats of PPDUs are availa ble Thus you can restrict analysis to the supported formats Note The PPDU format determines the available channel bandwidths For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The format of the first valid PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUS are analyzed only if they have the same format Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their format Meas only M Only PPDUs with the specified format are analyzed Demod all as D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified PPDU format Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat 1 AUTO TYPE on page 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Channel Bandwidth to measure CBW Defines the channel bandwidth of the PPDUs taking part in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different PPDU formats and channel bandwidths are supported
87. RSD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Querying results FETCh BURSt ALL on page 312 Result Summary Global The global result summary provides measurement results based on the complete sig nal consisting of all channels and streams The observation length is the number of PPDUS to be analyzed as defined by the Evaluation Range gt Statistics settings In contrast the detailed result summary provides results for each individual channel and stream For MIMO measurements IEEE 802 11 n the global result summary provides the results for all data streams whereas the detailed result summary provides the results for individiual streams cal Channel 18 ys Limit Limit Fig 3 25 Global result summary for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac n p standards SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 45 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Result Summary Global No of PPDUs Recognized 3 Analyzed 3 Analyzed Physical Channel 0 PPDUs Min Limit Unit 1 18 IQ Offset Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error enter Freq Error Chip Clock Error Rise Time Fall Time Fig 3 26 Global result summary for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS standards The Result Summary Global contains the following information Note You can configure which results are displayed see on page 161 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility Number of recognized PPDUs Numbe
88. Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 217 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 217 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 217 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 4 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 102 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 218 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 221 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band set
89. Results remote isch need re tc Step by step er ener eth RF overrange MIXER nt rr treten RF Power Ee 127 Trigger level remote 247 RUN CONT M 169 RUN SINGLE A 169 S Sample rate siue ns mt et Bt ters n pi bns Definition Digital Digital remote Displayed 22 Relationship to bandwidth 4 este Samples t 13 15 Scaling spiace a 166 SCIECE IM CAS 91 SEM Configuring cdma2000 171 Programming example 42259 acm T 53 S quencer cens 491 Abortirig remote rccte tenete 306 Activating remote etre 306 Mom 92 Mode remote 307 Remote 305 SOMK GY i 92 ici 92 Sequential MIMO capture method eere 134 Sequential manual MIMO capture method eere 135 Settings OVEIVICW secet osea o deseri rat bere 94 Short symbol SS IEEE 802 112 g OFDM 60 Signal capturing rre te ettet Remote control feci m M Signal description Configuling ucuic ctetuer tient ine
90. STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 10 11 3 10 11 3 1 10 11 3 2 Status Registers Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the WLAN application For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual e General Status Register 2 22 4140010006 351 e Readi
91. See Auto ID on page 105 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 215 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 105 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDoOYVer eee e unten tht their ndun gana 217 60 217 re n rr eae esate 217 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESSet 2 2 2 ori iiie La e 217 5 1 2 44144 0 218 teuer enti a dite eae eee 218 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALUue Loris eee usen ac epu Dec ene toto Y 219 ISENSeJMIXerHARMODIG i erronee re iet apex hs et qux x 219
92. Slaves set to the same external reference source as master Use an R amp S 711 trigger box to send to the same trigger to all devices see TRIG SEQ SOUR TUN EXTernal Slaves reference source is set to external Configure a trigger output from the master see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 251 OFF Slaves reference source is set to internal RST EXT Example CONF WLAN ANTM SOUR ROSC SOUR AUTO Manual operation See Reference Frequency Coupling on page 133 CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix STATe lt antenna gt lt State gt This remote control command specifies the state of the specified antenna Note it is not possible to change the state of the first antenna Master Parameters lt State gt ON OFF State of the antenna Manual operation See State on page 133 CONFigure WLAN DUTConfig lt NoOfAnt gt This remote control command specifies the number of antennas used for MIMO mea surement Parameters lt NoOfAnt gt TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 4 one antenna TX2 two antennas etc RST TX1 Example CONF WLAN DUTC TX1 Manual operation See DUT MIMO Configuration on page 132 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTUure lt SignalPath gt Specifies the signal path to be captured in MIMO sequential manual measurements Subsequently use the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command to start capturing data Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Toleranc
93. This command defines the center frequency Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency on page 96 See Center Frequency on page 113 See Center frequency on page 116 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 116 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step s
94. deine crested 224 SENSE GO VEESEl eel rt er pne exti dee ey Ree n ex cde S eres 225 SENSeTCORRection GVL SNUMDET Rota eta ttr rper ere td a vera 225 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Band gt K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 4 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 108 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can
95. for the pilot carriers determined by the default WLAN measurement For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Parameters Limit numeric value in dB The unit for the EVM parameters can be changed in advance using UNIT EVM on page 319 Default unit DB CALCulate LIMit BURSt FERRor AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt FERRor MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum center frequency error limit determined by the default WLAN measurement For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Parameters Limit numeric value in Hertz Default unit HZ CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum offset error limit deter mined by the default WLAN measurement For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Parameters Limit Range 1000000 to 1000000 Default unit DB Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 10 5 10 CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum symbol clock error limit deter mined by the default WLAN measurement For detail
96. ide VIG remote iie nete eee Format Data remote 327 PPBU r mole ined rtis eene 269 Free Run MIG QO Fusco etc 125 Freq Error vs Preamble IResultdisplays uii azote te trm 34 Frequency GCOMMQURALON 116 Configuration remote 234 Deviation 2 ees Error limit remote m Frequency offset Error limit check result 321 Digo 60 Frequency sweep measurements Configuring Selecting WELAN E Frontend Configuration remote 234 Parameters ooo vae a 84 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 232 Digital ra cities 111 Digital 1 Q 229 230 Unit digital remote 230 G Gain Tracking IEEE 802 11 9 OFDM p 62 ha 13 17 19 NOES 319 Group delay Isesultdisplay erinnere 35 Trace data 940 Guard iritetval rrt rettet eere ees 13 Displayed ette mi teri tenens 11 Length PPDUS nes 148 154 262 263 H Handover frequency External MIXER
97. lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 115 See Level on page 115 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 115 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 116 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the
98. matches with the expected antennas Otherwise the secondary diagonal will contain the useful traces Remote command CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix ANTenna lt Analyzer gt page 253 Joined RX Sync and Tracking Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup This command configures how PPDU synchronization and tracking is performed for multiple captured antenna signals ON RX antennas are synchronized and tracked together OFF RX antennas are synchronized and tracked separately Remote command CONFigure WLAN RSYNc JOINed on page 256 Reference Frequency Coupling Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup For simultaneous MIMO setups you can set the reference frequency source for all slave devices to the same setting as the master device Slaves Refer Both the master and all slaves use the same reference according to ence same the setting at the master Master setting R amp S FSW K91 Configuration ee ee ee ee Slaves Exter The slave devices are set to use the external reference from the mas nal Master ter The master device uses its internal reference Internal Configure the master to send its reference frequency to all slave devi ces via one of its REF OUTPUT connectors See the R amp S FSW User Manual for details Off Both the master and slave devices use their own internal references the frequencies are not coupled Remote command CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix SOURce ROSCillator SOURce on page 253 Sequential Using OS
99. measured at the channel center frequency shall be at least 15 dB below the peak SIN x x power spectrum The RF carrier suppression shall be measured while transmitting a repetitive 01 data sequence with the scrambler dis abled using DQPSK modulation A 100 kHz resolution bandwidth shall be used to per form this measurement Comparison to IQ offset measurement in the R amp S FSW WLAN application The IQ offset measurement in the R amp S FSW WLAN application returns the current car rier feedthrough normalized to the mean power at the symbol timings This measure ment does not require a special test signal and is independent of the transmit filter shape The RF carrier suppression measured according to the standard is inversely propor tional to the IQ offset measured the R amp S FSW WLAN application The difference in dB between the two values depends on the transmit filter shape and should be deter mined with a reference measurement The following table lists the difference exemplarily for three transmit filter shapes 0 5 dB Transmit filter 1Q Offset dB RF Carrier Suppression dB Rectangular 11 dB Root raised cosine a 0 3 10 dB Gaussian a 0 3 9 dB EVM Measurement The R amp S FSW WLAN application provides two different types of EVM calculation PPDU EVM Direct method The PPDU EVM direct method evaluates the root mean square EVM over one PPDU That is the square root of the
100. measurement signal estimate of the reference signal 4 2 1 Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS v estimate of the power normalized and undisturbed reference signal ARG calculation of the angle of a complex value EVM error vector magnitude IMAG calculation of the imaginary part of a complex value PPDU protocol data unit a burst in the signal containing transmission data PSDU protocol service data unit a burst in the signal containing service data REAL calculation of the real part of a complex value e Block Diagram for Single Carrier 66 e Calculation of Signal Parameters t ret binae eter Ero e ERR 68 e Literature on the IEEE 802 11b 71 Block Diagram for Single Carrier Measurements A block diagram of the measurement application is shown below in figure 4 2 The baseband signal of an IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS wireless LAN system transmit antenna is sampled with a sample rate of 44 MHz The first task of the measurement application is to detect the position of the PPDU within the measurement signal r4 v The detection algorithm is able to find the the beginning of short and long PPDUs and can distinguish between them The algorithm also detects the initial state of the scrambler which is not specified by the IEEE 802 11
101. mum I Q offset average EVM all carriers max EVM all car riers gt average EVM data carriers max EVM data carriers average EVM pilots max EVM pilots CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum error vector magnitude limit for all carriers as determined by the default WLAN measurement For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Parameters Limit numeric value in dB The unit for the EVM parameters can be changed in advance using UNIT EVM on page 319 Default unit DB CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum error vector magnitude limit for the data carrier determined by the default WLAN measurement For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Limit gt numeric value in dB The unit for the EVM parameters can be changed in advance using UNIT EVM on page 319 Default unit DB CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM PILot AVERage Limit CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM PILot MAXimum Limit This command sets or queries the average or maximum error vector magnitude limit
102. rassis o kot dead Digital 1 Enbanced modes ceti o tetro etate 126 Input connection information 111 Input settings TWIG GETING Digital input Connection information 111 Digital standard 13 15 Channel 143 146 152 BISplayed sociae eor b ee 11 Selecting m Selecting remote rto entretient 209 Direct path Input config ratiorii cco nte rt retten penes 99 ra etd Pedo 212 Display Configuration softkey sse 93 Understanding 10 Drop out time WIG QGP EI I 86 128 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 197 E Electronic input 120 Enhanced mode Digital IQ iicet tees 126 Errors Calculating 62 Calculating parameters IEEE 802 11 g OFDM j Center frequency CROSSIANK Device CONNECHONS 348 2 13 17 19 MERI iiec A 13 17 D 19 ine iet e
103. terreri 102 External Mixer Remote control 217 Harmonics Conversion loss table sicn External Mixer Remote control i Order External Mixer 103 Type External Mixer eene 103 High pass filter Remote RF input Hysteresis ELI 129 data Export file binary data description 372 Export file parameter description 369 Exporting Exporting remote Exporting Importing Importing Importing remote Importing EXportihgi sir eerte ntt Maximum bandwidth tr ntes Ie measurements Configuring remote zn l Qrmismatoli e eitis tie nere t es Mismatch lier Limit check result remote 45 Limits Power TAGGER es cete et Don n o st ie ar nds 127 Trigger level remote VQ SKEW 19 IEEE 802 11a Signal PFOCESSING xoci rti pete te ei bn ox 58 IEEE 802 11 OFDM j p Literature beet e OM inan na 65 Modulation forriats iet ornnes 81 IEEE 802 11g OFDM Signal PrOCESSING rti mette o me Cn eren 58 IEEE 802 11n Modulation formats cce tor eoe ean 81 IF Power Trigger level remote
104. the PPDUS detected in the capture buffer are to be demodulated 11 Select the MIMO tab in the Demodulation dialog box to define which spatial mapping mode is used that is how the space time streams are mapped to the antennas a If necessary include a time shift for the individual antennas b Ifthe signal power is amplified according to the maxtrix entries so that the total transmitted power is not increased the measured powers can be normalised to consider this effect in demodulation 12 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which data in the capture buffer you want to analyze 13 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 14 Exit the SmartGrid mode 15 For the master analyzer only Activate the NOISE SOURCE output for the connection to the R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit For an R amp S FSW as a master analyzer a Press the INPUT OUTPUT key b Select Output Config C Select Noise Source On R amp S9FSW K91 How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application 16 Trigger a new sweep by pressing the TRIG MANUAL button on the Trigger Unit The data is captured from all antennas automatically The data is collected by the master R amp S FSW which evaluates the entire data and updates the result displays for the individual data streams when the measurement is stopped 8 3 How to Determine the
105. the number of PPDUs contributing to the current results may vary extremely Remote command SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe on page 276 SENSe BURSt COUNt on page 275 Equal PPDU Length If enabled only PPDUs with the specified Min Max Payload Length are considered for measurement analysis If disabled a maximum and minimum Min Max Payload Length can be defined and all PPDUs whose length is within this range are considered Remote command IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal on page 279 IEEE 802 11 b g DSSS SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal on page 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal on page 277 Min Max Payload Length If the Equal PPDU Length setting is enabled the payload length defines the exact length a PPDU must have to be considered for analysis If the Equal PPDU Length setting is disabled you can define the minimum and maxi mum payload length a PPDU must contain to be considered in measurement analysis The payload length can be defined as a duration in us or a number of bytes only if specific PPDU modulation and format are defined for analysis see PPDU Format to measure on page 142 Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MIN on page 277 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN on page 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MAX on page 277 SENSe DEMod
106. with a spectral mask specified by the WLAN 802 11 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass Thus the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note The WLAN 802 11 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions For details see chapter 5 4 2 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 171 ER User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 53 R amp S9FSW K91 Ref Level 41 00 dBm Offset 40 00 dB Limit Check 31 lt P lt 39 2 Result Summary Tx Power 33 74 dBm Range Low Range Up 12 750 MHz 8 000 MHz MHz MHz MHz MH MHz MHz MHz MHz 50 MHz 8 000 MHz Mode Auto Sweep Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz Frequency 2 09153 GHz 2 09494 GHz 2 09642 GHz 2 09652 GHz 2 09739 GHz 2 10259 GHz 2 10342 GHz 2 10373 GHz 2 10439 GHz 2 11026 GHz Fig 3 29 SEM measurement results Remote command Querying results TRAC DATA LIST see Occupied Bandwidth Measurements and Result Displays Span 25 5 MHz W CDMA 3GPP DL RBW 1 000 MHz Power Rel ALimit 73 11 dB 18 61 dB 73 48 dB 22 98 dB 84 65 dB 21 15 dB 85 57 dB 22 65 dB 86 07 dB 34 57 dB 83 11 dB 31 61 dB 84 42 dB 22 27 dB 85 55 dB 22 05 dB 72 37 dB 21 87 dB 72 97 dB 18 47 dB Power Abs 39 37 dBm 39 75 dBm 50 91 dBm 51 84 dBm 52 33 dBm 49 37 dBm 50 68 dBm 51 81 dBm 38 64 dBm 39 24 dBm on page 208 on page 323 on page 329
107. 02 L za oerrzogd 3331 9 56 22 uonenbe 2 02 L za oer rzogd 3331 s 6 uonenbe 2 02 YEW L za oel rzogd 3331 p 65 02 uonenbe zL0z L1 z08 PIS 3991 0L OL zz uonoes ZLOZ YEW L Za oer 3991 Z sJeuueoqns 0L LL 0z uonoes 2102 11 208 PIS 3331 Sjuejs uoo 5 22 2 02 YEW 3331 LL LLL fb O L etes SZ LL LL SZ ec 9 804 Ov Sjuejs uoo 1 5 22 2 02 YEW L Zqj er 1 219 0 L 96 20024 42 24 79 02 Sjuejsuoo 1 9 02 981 2108 11208 PIS dal LL LLL b O L vL 66 SZ LL LL SZ eg 9 801 Ov Sjuejsuoo pe e aJ Bulw 9 0z 981 2102 11208 PIS dal 2 219 0 9S ALS 22 23 25 v9 02 ULL SJojeujeJed payejas Bulwl s g1 ZL0Z L 1208 PIS dal LL 0 L 24 52272 42 9r v9 02 1 6 8 2108 11208 PIS dal LL 0 L 25 c 42 23 79 OL ds SJejeuJeJed pejejou Butuir 9 9 1 08 981 2102 11208 PIS dal LL 0 24 uc ue v 9r v9 g uu dSN 49H 5s 11830 p sny 1 N 26 jeoqns Da 25 26 1019 os P9Sn JO ON ny ON zu pep paenBny
108. 119 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 119 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 119 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 240 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example 30
109. 201 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 91 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Signal Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Signal Characteristic IEEE 802 11a Prior IEEE 802 11 2012 Standard 96 T 96 Tolerance LM ied 96 Standard Defines the WLAN standard depending on which WLAN options are installed The measurements are performed according to the specified standard with the correct limit values and limit lines Many other WLAN measurement settings depend on the selected standard see chap ter 4 6 Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters on page 81 Note In MSRA operating
110. 24 See Bitstream on page 25 See Constellation on page 27 See Constellation vs Carrier on page 29 See EVM vs Carrier on page 30 See EVM vs Chip on page 31 See EVM vs Symbol on page 31 See FFT Spectrum on page 32 See Freq Error vs Preamble on page 34 See Gain Imbalance vs Carrier on page 34 See Group Delay on page 35 See Magnitude Capture on page 36 See Phase Error vs Preamble on page 38 See Phase Tracking on page 38 See PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b g DSSS on page 39 See PvT Full PPDU on page 40 See PvT Rising Edge on page 41 See PvT Falling Edge on page 42 See Quad Error vs Carrier on page 43 See Result Summary Detailed on page 44 See Result Summary Global on page 45 See Signal Field on page 47 See Spectrum Flatness on page 50 See Diagram on page 56 See Result Summary on page 56 See Marker Table on page 56 See Marker Peak List on page 57 Table 10 9 lt WindowType gt parameter values for WLAN application Parameter value Window type Window types for I Q data AMAM AM AM IEEE 802 11a 9 OFDM ac n p only AMEV AM EVM IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac n p only AMPM AM PM IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac n p only BITStream Bitstream CMEMory Magnitude Capture CONStellation Constellation CVCarrier Constellation vs Carrier IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p only EVCarrier EVM vs Carrier IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p
111. 4 Carrier Symbol 1 2 Carrier Symbol 1 122 11001101 00100011 11001110 122 01001101 00111101 10111011 119 11101001 10101000 00010010 119 11100110 00000111 00001011 116 00000001 00101101 10100010 116 01110110 00001011 01011101 113 01010001 10011000 00010010 113 00110011 00010010 01101101 110 10000010 11101011 11100100 110 01000000 00011101 107 01001111 11101100 11001101 107 11100010 01000010 01000111 104 10010001 0 01010000 104 00111110 0 11001001 int 00000111 00101101 01010011 101 01001111 11001101 01001101 Fig 3 8 Bitstream result display for IEEE 802 11 MIMO measurements User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 26 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays _ For single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS the results are grouped by PPDU 4 Bitstream PPDU 1 PLCP Preamble 0 24 48 72 96 120 PLCP Header 0 24 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 01010000 00000100 10000000 10011100 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000101 00100000 11001000 01000010 10101011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11001111 00000000 01000110 00110000 00001101 Fig 3 9 Bitstream result display for IEEE 802 11b 9 DSSS standards The numeric trace results for this ev
112. 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB a Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band Viele elei eiecit Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON A Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CO SENS CO R RR CVL BAND USER R SENS COR R R R CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA SENS CO SENS CO SENS CVL MIX FS 260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB Configuring the mixer band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table S
113. 97 175 176 368 372 VQ eene 342 erc M M 176 Extension Spatial Streams PPDUs 153 261 External MIXGI uictor nta rer 101 Activating remote control 214 neret i res 102 217 Basic settings niet ert rette 104 fo c To U rz i e o ER 100 Conversion TOSS suisid te te n reas 103 Conversion loss tables 106 107 range i e noe t mre eaa 101 Handover frequency cene terree 102 Harmonie Order tert ette 103 Harmonie cicer nt retro rientro tyi 103 109 Programming example RANGE eene Restoring band entente erre erect RF oVerrafige uenerit RF Start RF Stop Serial number trn Lote trm repetens External trigger Level remote F FFT AWGN channel IEEE 802 118 g OFDM p 60 COMMONS 80 Signal processing IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 60 Spectrum result display rennes 32 Spectrum trace data Start offset Start offset Files Format VQ data ice tees data binary XML parameter XML Filters Adjacent channels corio rtr ete entienda High pass remote High pass RF input
114. Freq Phase Err vs Preamble This user manual contains a description of the functionality that is specific to the appli cation including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes R amp S FSW K91 Welcome to the WLAN Application 2 1 Starting the WLAN Application The WLAN measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW To activate the WLAN application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the WLAN item gt TT WLAN The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the WLAN application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the WLAN Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 94 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in th
115. GIMBalance on page 319 Retrieving Results Remote commands exclusive to retrieving limit check results CALGUulatecLIMIEBURSECALESRESUlE 52 222 1 cece ro era t a bead ah se pe tan sr Rene ve hne Rega 320 022 320 400204 320 320 5 2 320 CALOulate LIMit BURStEVM PILot AVERage 2 00 321 321 0 321 321 CALOCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset AVERage RESUIt eese 321 CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset 5 321 CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror AVERage RESUIt sse 322 5 322 CALCulate LIMit BURSt ALL RESult This
116. I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz 40 MHz MSRA master 50 MHz to 600 MHz A 1 7 R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz 1 8 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input maximum bandwidth 80 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz MSRA master 100 MHz to 600 MHz 80 MHz R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Exten sion sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz QD A 1 9 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz MSRA master 200 MHz to 600 MHz 160 MHz Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated I Q Bandwidth Extension Option B320 U320 Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz MSRA master 400 MHz to 600 MHz 320 MHz A 1 10 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input ctivated o
117. MHz 64QAM 160 MHz 256QAM 1024QAM IEEE 802 11b DBPSK 1 Mbps Short PPDU 22 MHz g DSSS DQPSK 2 Mbps Long PPDU CCK 5 5 Mbps amp 11 Mbps PBCC 5 5 Mbps amp 11 Mbps requires R amp S FSW bandwidth extension option see chapter A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input on page 361 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Standard Modulation formats PPDU formats Channel bandwidths IEEE 802 11n SISO HT MF Mixed format 20 MHz 40 MHz BPSK 6 5 7 2 13 5 amp HT GF Greenfield format 15 Mbps QPSK 13 14 4 19 5 21 7 27 30 40 5 amp 45 Mbps 16QAM 26 28 9 39 43 3 54 60 81 amp 90 Mbps 64QAM 52 57 8 58 5 65 72 2 108 121 5 135 120 135 amp 150 Mbps MIMO depends on the MCS index requires R amp S FSW bandwidth extension option see chapter A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input page 361 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output Such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as s
118. Minimum EVM value for subcarrier Nyseq 1 2 1 Minimum EVM used EVM Nused EV Mstatistic Length Nused Minimum EVM value for subcarrier Nuseq 1 2 10 9 4 11 EVM vs Chip These results are only available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Since the R amp S FSW WLAN application provides two different methods to calculate the EVM two traces are available TRACE1 EVM IEEE values TRACE2 EVM Direct values Each trace shows the EVM value as measured over the complete capture period The number of repeating groups that are returned is equal to the number of measured chips Each EVM value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of dBm Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii REAL 10 9 4 12 EVM vs Symbol Three traces types are available with this measurement The basic trace types show either the minimum mean or maximum EVM value as measured over the complete capture period 10 9 4 13 10 9 4 14 Retrieving Results The number of repeating groups that are returned is equal to the number of measured symbols Each EVM value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of dBm Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii REAL TRACE1 Minimum EVM values TRACE2 Mean EVM values TRACE3 Maximum EVM values These results are not available for single carrier measurements
119. OBW SEM ACLR or CCDF for WLAN Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the WLAN application The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the WLAN application I Q data acquisition is performed by default 2 Select the Signal Description button to define the digital standard to be used 3 Select the required measurement a Press the MEAS key b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for WLAN immedi ately 4 For SEM measurements select the required standard settings file a In the SEMask menu select the Standard Files softkey b Select the required settings file The subdirectory displayed in the file selection dialog box depends on the standard you selected in step step 2 5 f necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 7 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 8 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers
120. ON Item is displayed in Result Summary OFF Item is not displayed in Result Summary RST ON Table 10 10 Parameters for the items of the Result Summary Detailed Result in table SCPI parameter TX channel Tx All TALL offset IOFSset Gain imbalance GIMBalance Quadrature offset QOFFset skew IQSKew PPDU power TPPower Crest factor TCFactor Receive channel Rx All RALL PPDU power RPPower Crest factor RCFactor Bitstream Stream All SALL Pilot bit error rate BPILot EVM all carriers SEACarriers EVM data carriers SEDCarriers EVM pilot carriers SEPCarriers Table 10 11 Parameters for the items of the Result Summary Global Result in table SCPI parameter Pilot bit error rate PBERate EVM all carriers EACarriers EVM data carriers EDCarriers EVM pilot carriers EPCarriers Center frequency error CFERror Symbol clock error SCERror Configuring the Result Display 10 7 4 Configuring the Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay Result Dis plays The following command is only relevant for the Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay result displays CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness CSELect lt ChannelType gt This remote control command configures the Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay results to be based on either effective or physical channels This command is only valid for IEEE 802 11n and IEEE 802 11ac standards While the physical channels cannot always be determi
121. OUTPUT 4 RF INPUT Trigger iota Slave Analyzer 2 Drop Out Time RF INPUT TRIG INPUT TRIG OUTIL TRIGGER INPUT TRIG OUT TRIG MANUAL Slave Analyzer 3 Slope ue m Falling naples RF INPUT NOISE SOURCE TRIG OUTS TRIGGER INPUT Holdoff Cable Trigger Cable Trigger Optional DUT with TRIGGER OUTPUT Hysteresis Cable RF External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Type Pulse Length Trigger 3 For more information on trigger settings see 84 ER FE FE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 124 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance E Trigger Level Moda ao t dele tni xo aii doi 128 MEO 4t PRONTO 128 L posent TON ra a Mats 128 L Drop Out TIME tell ach TT 128 128 NEUE UU NT 129 EU 4107 MEN 129 llo P 129 Moge ee NEP 129 ha 00 12 7 MAMHMMIIE Em 129 Ig 130 L Output cinereo iiA bt rd rt pa boe prid D 130 Lo HQ 131 E Pulse DONE 131 L Seng Ns NEN 131 Trigger Source Settings The Trigger Source se
122. Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW lt gt 4 01 250 ene 251 gt 251 lt gt 252 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LEENGth ies ez tirer nnne nnne bog a denn aa 252 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Suffix lt port gt Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 115 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt sOTYPe Suffix
123. Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 for a list of availa ble window types R amp S9FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE page 289 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 10 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls lt Index2 gt The index of a window on the other side
124. R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 233 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input 1 or only the center frequency is always 0 Hz WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequ
125. RST 1 Example SENS TRAC PHAS ON Manual operation See Phase Tracking on page 140 SENSe TRACking PILots lt Mode gt In case tracking is used the used pilot sequence has an effect on the measurement results 10 5 7 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Mode gt STANdard DETected STANdard The pilot sequence is determined according to the correspond ing WLAN standard In case the pilot generation algorithm of the device under test DUT has a problem the non standard con form pilot sequence might affect the measurement results or the WLAN application might not synchronize at all onto the signal generated by the DUT DETected The pilot sequence detected in the WLAN signal to be analyzed is used by the WLAN application In case the pilot generation algorithm of the device under test DUT has a problem the non standard conform pilot sequence will not affect the measure ment results In case the pilot sequence generated by the DUT is correct it is recommended that you use the According to Standard setting because it generates more accurate measure ment results RST STANdard Example SENS TRAC PIL DET Manual operation See Pilots for Tracking on page 140 SENSe TRACking TIME State Activates or deactivates the compensation for timing drift If activated the measure ment results are compensated for timing error on a per symbol ba
126. S TATUS QUEStonable P TRANSO Mins icc on e ceterae Eee een eon decuit e tari nies 353 5 lt 5 20 0 0 0 0000000 003 enne nennen eene nnns nnne nnn nnns nnns 352 STATus QUESItionable SYNG ENABIe rere parer reete etr voee tta a e v e e XXE EYE Fee TOI 352 S TATUs QUEStIonable S YNGCNTRGanSIEOID ioco a ecco eee setae cae trece en 353 5 353 STATus QUESItionable SYNGEEMENI iecore theatro te ero enn reete rex See 352 331 TRACSNQ SRAT 2 e 243 Msc BEP 329 o 331 TRIGger SEQuerice LEVel POWSF AU O eet rtp n trt tr er nene rrt e n erede Eon 247 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLJ Ooft 2 2 rrt rnt tr rene nr rein 244 TRIGGEr 5 244 TRIGger SEQuence HOL Dott TIME guanti e Creep cedet pere rein cp 244 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDJO T 2 ttr rrr rere t tnr rrr err Rea 244 TRIGger SEQuerice pIFPower FIYS Teresi orrae nter
127. SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 306 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Refresh MSRA only This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sw
128. STS Stream is defined The upper value is the real part part of the complex element The lower value is the imagi nary part of the complex element Additionally a Time Shift can be defined for cyclic delay diversity CSD Remote command CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch on page 264 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX lt ch gt STReam lt stream gt on page 265 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch TIMeshift on page 265 5 3 9 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which objects the result displays are based on The avail able settings depend on the selected standard e Evaluation Range Settings for IEEE 802 11 g OFDM n 156 e Evaluation Range Settings for IEEE 802 11b 9 0555 159 5 3 9 1 Evaluation Range Settings for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p The following settings are available to configure the evaluation range for standards IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p R amp S FSW K91 Configuration Evaluation Range PPDU to analyze Analyze this PPDU PPDU to Analyze Statistics PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDU s to Analyze Time Domain EDITI EUR Take From Signal Field Equal PPDU Length Min No of Data Symbols Max No of Data Symbols Analyze this PPDU PPDU to Analyze If enabled the WLAN I Q results are based on one individual PPDU only namely the defined PPDU to Analyze The result displays are updat
129. The Occupied Bandwidth OBW measurement determines the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth is indicated as the Occ BW function result in the marker table the frequency markers used to determine it are also displayed Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10 dB SWT ims 2 Marker Table Type Ref Mt Stimulus Tre 2 09963 GHz Hz s RBW 30kHz VBW 300 kHz Mode Auto FFT Response 27 37 dBm User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 27 37 dBm 2 0996300 GHz Span 11 52 MHz Function Function Result cc Bw 4 166073926 MHz 54 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 2 For details see chapter 5 4 3 Occupied Bandwidth on page 172 Remote command CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum OBWidth IMMediate on page 208 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 324 CCDF The CCDF complementary cumulative distribution function measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes The measurement captures a user definable amount of samples and calculates their mean power As a result the probability that a sample s power is higher than the calculated mean power x dB is displayed The crest factor is displayed in the Result
130. The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected channel carrier or PPDU to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the channel carrier PPDU is analyzed within the application data 5 3 6 Synchronization and OFDM Demodulation Synchronization settings have an effect on which parts of the input signal are pro cessed during the WLAN measurement umi ag m Synchronization Power Interval Search OFDM Demodulation Power Interval SCAG i 137 137 Power Interval Search If enabled the R amp S FSW WLAN application initially performs a coarse burst search on the input signal in which increases in the power vs time trace are detected Further time consuming processing is then only performed where bursts are assumed This improves the measurement speed for signals with low duty cycle rates However for signals in which the PPDU power levels differ significantly this option should be disabled as otherwise some PPDUs may not be detected Remote command SENSe DEMod TXARea on page 257 FFT Start Offset This command specifies the start offset of the FFT for OFDM demodulation not for the FFT Spectrum display 5 3 7 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance AUTO The FFT start offset is
131. The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 223 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 4 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 221 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 224 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 105 Remote c
132. WLAN MIMO CAPT TYP MAN see CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure TYPE on page 255 Single Cont Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture Starts a single or continuous new measurement for the corresponding antenna Remote command CONF WLAN MIMO CAPT RX1 see CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure on page 254 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 306 Calc Results Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture Calculates the results for the captured antenna signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt BURSt IMMediate on page 305 Clear All Magnitude Capture Buffers Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture Clears all the capture buffers and previews RUN SGL RUN CONT updates Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture Determines which capture buffer is used to store data if a measurement is started via the global RUN SGL RUN CONT keys User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 136 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 5 3 5 Application Data MSRA For the R amp S FSW WLAN application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see chapter 5 3 4 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 121 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the WLAN 802 11 I Q measurement see Capture Offset on page 123
133. WLAN application compares the HT SIG length against the length esti mated from the PPDU power profile If the two values do not match the corresponding entry is highlighted orange If the signal quality is very bad this comparison is sup pressed and the message above is shown Warning HT SIG of PPDU was not evaluated Decoding of the HT SIG was not possible because there was to not enough data in the Capture Memory potential PPDU truncation Warning Mismatch between HT SIG and estimated SNR Power PPDU length The HT SIG length and the length estimated by the R amp S FSW WLAN application from the PPDU power profile are different SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 189 Error Messages and Warnings Warning Physical Channel estimation impossible Phy Chan results not availa ble Possible reasons channel matrix not square or singular to working preci sion The Physical Channel results could not be calculated for one or both of the following reasons The spatial mapping can not be applied due to a rectangular mapping matrix the number of space time streams is not equal to the number of transmit antennas The spatial mapping matrices are singular to working precision PPDUS are dismissed due to inconsistencies Hint PPDU requires at least one payload symbol Currently at least one payload symbol is required in order to successfully analyze the PPDU Null data packet NDP sounding PPDUS
134. a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage 192 R amp S9 FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements 10 2 2 10 2 3 If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules
135. a signal overload is detected when an auto level measurement is performed 6 Auto level NoSIGnal This bit is set if no signal is detected by the auto level measurement Status Registers No Meaning 7 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 10 11 2 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital I Q input and output This register is used by the optional Digital Baseband Interface The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition on page 349 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 350 Bit No Meaning 0 Digital Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S is established 2 Digital Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 Digital 1 Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL
136. absolute delay is of interest but rather the deviation between carriers Thus the mean delay over all carriers is deducted For an ideal channel the phase increases linearly which causes a constant time delay over all carriers In this case a horizontal line at the zero value would be the result The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chap ter 10 9 4 14 Group Delay on page 340 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH GDEL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONF BURS SPEC FLAT SEL GRD see CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness SELect on page 206 and CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness IMMediate page 207 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 14 Group Delay on page 340 Magnitude Capture The Magnitude Capture Buffer display shows the complete range of captured data for the last sweep Green bars at the bottom of the Magnitude Capture Buffer display indi cate the positions of the analyzed PPDUs A blue bar indicates the selected PPDU if the evaluation range is limited to a single PPDU see Analyze this PPDU PPDU to Analyze on page 157 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 36 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Magnitude Capture EA Rx1 Rx2 1 1 Rx 1 Freq 13 25 GHz Att 4 dB 2 0000125 ms Fig 3 16 Magnitude capture display for single PPDU evaluation Note MIMO measurements When you capture
137. amp S FSW The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable I Q bandwidth consequence signals within the usable bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable I Q bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable band width Bandwidth extension options D The maximum usable I Q bandwidth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the ini tial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provi ded by the individual option is indicated by its number for example B40 extends the bandwidth to 40 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them As a rule the usable bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the I Q bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks e Bandwidth Extension 362 e Relationship Between Sample Rate and Usable Bandwidth 362 e Relationship Between Sample
138. and where appro priate also in human readable form beneath the bit sequence for each PPDU Table 3 4 Demodulation results in PLCP Header result display IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Result Description Example PPDU Number of the decoded PPDU PPDU 1 A colored block indicates that the PPDU was successfully deco ded Signal Information in signal field 01101110 The decoded data rate is shown below 11 MBits s Service Information in service field 00100000 Symbol clock state Modulation format Length extension Lock CCK bit state where Symbol clock state Locked Modulation format see table 4 1 Length extension bit state 1 set not set PSDU Length Information in length field 0000000001 11100 Time required to transmit the PSDU 0 120 us CRC Information in CRC field 111010011100111 Result of cyclic redundancy code check OK or Failed 0 OK Remote command LAY ADD or 1 RIGH SFI see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 CONFigure BURSt STATistics SFIeld IMMediate on page 207 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 18 Signal Field on page 342 El User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 39 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays PvT Full PPDU Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time diagram for all PPDUs PVT Full PPDU Min 2 Avg 3 Max 1 Start 5 0
139. and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Data File Format iq tar Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary 1 data of all channels There must be only one single data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the parameter XML file and a preview of the data in a w
140. as first PPDU Al Auto individual for each PPDU M lt x gt Meas only the specified PPDUs lt x gt D lt x gt Demod all with specified parameter lt y gt The Signal Field measurement indicates certain inconsistencies in the signal or dis crepancies between the demodulation settings and the signal to be analyzed In both cases an appropriate warning is displayed and the results for the PPDU are highligh ted orange both in the Signal Field display and the Magnitude Capture display If the signal was analyzed with warnings the results indicated by a message also con tribute to the overall analysis results R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays OO a ees PPDUs detected in the signal that do not pass the logical filter i e are not to be inclu ded in analysis are dismissed An appropriate message is provided The correspond ing PPDU in the capture buffer is not highlighted The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chap ter 10 9 4 18 Signal Field on page 342 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SFI see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt STATistics SFIeld IMMediate page 207 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 18 Signal Field on page 342 Spectrum Flatness The Spectrum Flatness trace is derived from the magnitude of the estimated channel transfer function Since this estimated channel is calculated from all
141. at the edges The channel can then be determined using the active carriers as known points inactive carriers are interpolated Recognized vs Analyzed PPDUs A PPDU in a WLAN signal consists of the following parts For IEEE 802 11n see also figure 4 4 Preamble Information required to recognize the PPDU within the signal for example training fields Signal Field Information on the modulation used for transmission of the useful data Payload The useful data During signal processing PPDUs are recognized by their preamble symbols The rec ognized PPDUs and the information on the modulation used for transmission of the useful data are shown in the Signal Field result display see Signal Field on page 47 Not all of the recognized PPDUs are analyzed Some are dismissed because the PPDU parameters do not match the user defined demodulation settings which act as a logical filter see also chapter 4 6 Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters on page 81 Others may be dismissed because they contain too many or too few payload symbols as defined by the user or due to other irregularities or inconsis tency Dismissed PPDUs are indicated as such in the Signal Field result display highlighted red with a reason for dismissal PPDUs with detected inconsistencies are indicated by orange highlighting and a warn ing in the Signal Field result display but are nevertheless analyzed and included in statistical and
142. averaged error power normalized by the averaged refer ence power N 1 X ref N 1 IX er n n 0 Before calculation of the EVM tracking errors in the measured signal are compensated for if specified by the user In the ideal reference signal the tracking errors are always N 1 Y le n 0 EVM X ref 3 11 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance compensated for Tracking errors include phase center frequency error common phase error timing Sampling frequency error and gain errors quadrature offset and gain imbalance errors however are not corrected The PPDU EVM is not part of the IEEE standard and no limit check is specified Never theless this commonly used EVM calculation can provide some insight in modulation quality and enables comparisons to other modulation standards Q Fig 3 6 l Q diagram for EVM calculation Peak Vector Error IEEE method The peak vector error Peak EVM is defined in section 18 4 7 8 Transmit modulation accuracy of the IEEE 802 11b standard The phase timing and gain tracking errors of the measurement signal center frequency error common phase error sampling fre quency error are compensated for before EVM calculation The standard does not specify a normalization factor for the error vector magnitude To get an EVM value that is independent of the level the R amp S FSW WLAN appl
143. cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 238 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 239 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 120 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation
144. cnet ees 328 Signal field 47 142 145 151 271 Start POSITION t metres 310 STBC IEEE 802 11 ac n 147 153 265 Synchronization 133 Timing errors 140 260 Total analyzed caetera 13 15 Validas e eich eked 80 PPDUs Evaluation range Preamble Channel estimation 139 258 cabs 319 Preamplifier SEWING 121 SOflKGy rece e ees 121 Preset Bands External Mixer remote control 217 External MIXeE 102 Presetting c M 95 Pretrigger sarcinas 129 Programming examples External MIXet ete bet tes 225 e HT 359 Statistics ansen aeiia r a 356 WANN cuiii te Da ct teenie yeni nen 356 Protection RF input es RF input remote PSDU a 66 Falling edge result display 42 Pull PP DW e ena orad asire esanta badia aeeai Full PPDU result display Rising Falling Rising edge result display PvT Full Burst Trace e arenira A aai 341 Q Quadrature offset a a 18 19 NOR A T 13 R Record length 1 T Relationship to sample
145. command returns the result of the EVM limit check for all carriers The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt ALL on page 281 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL AVERage RESult CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum RESult This command returns the result of the average or maximum EVM limit check The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum on page 281 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA AVERage RESult CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA MAXimum RESult This command returns the result of the average or maximum EVM limit check for data carriers The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM DATA 1 page 281 Retrieving Results Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM PILot AVERage RESult CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM PILot MAXimum RESult This command returns the resu
146. coo eu an 255 GONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP MObDule 4 2 tnr Ene Ra Rene ne Rene ken 256 1 11 4114444 10 256 CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix ADDRess add Address This remote control command specifies the TCP IP address for each receiver path in IPV4 format Note it is not possible to set the IP address of ANTMatrix1 Master Parameters Address TCP IP address in IPV4 format Manual operation See Analyzer IP Address on page 133 CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix ANTenna lt Analyzer gt Antenna This remote control command specifies the antenna assignment of the receive path Parameters Antenna ANTenna1 ANTenna2 ANTenna3 ANTenna4 Antenna assignment of the receiver path Example CONF WLAN ANTM ANT2 1 Analyzer number 2 measures antenna no 1 WLAN ANTM ANT4 ANT2 Analyzer number 42 measures antenna no 2 Manual operation See Assignment on page 133 CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix SOURce ROSCillator SOURce Coupling This remote control command determines whether the reference frequency for the master and slave devices in a simultaneous MIMO setup are coupled or not Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Coupling gt Coupling mode AUTO
147. enabled see SENSe BURSt SELect STATe on page 276 the WLAN 802 11 I Q results are based on the specified PPDU If disabled all detected PPDUS in the current capture buffer are evaluated Parameters Value RST 1 Example SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 2 Results are based on the PPDU number 2 only Manual operation See Analyze this PPDU PPDU to Analyze on page 157 SENSe BURSt SELect STATe State Defines the evaulation basis for result displays Note that this setting is only applicable after a measurement has been performed Parameters State OFF 0 1 OFF 0 All detected PPDUs in the current capture buffer are evaluated ON 1 The WLAN 802 11 I Q results are based on one individual PPDU only namely the defined using SENSe BURSt SELect on page 276 As soon as a new measurement is started the evaluation range is reset to all PPDUS in the current capture buf fer RST 0 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 2 Results are based on the PPDU number 2 only Manual operation See Analyze this PPDU PPDU to Analyze on page 157 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal State For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS signals only If enabled only PPDUs with a specific payload length are considered for measure ment analysis If disabled only PPDUs whose
148. ense irn Annn ns 296 LAY oup WINDOWSA REPL AGE aoina ee edere aede coa nae e tu ru 296 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display Manual operation See on page 23 See on page 24 See AM EVM on page
149. gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 121 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifier hardware This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 121 10 5 4 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the R amp S FSW WLAN application in MSRA mode define the application data extract For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual e General Capture 242 e Configuring Triggered Measurements esses enne 243 MIMO Capture Selle nto nte rere cerei nee Hd a esca eria 252 10 5 4 1 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modula
150. in the WLAN application the following common suffixes are used Table 10 1 Common suffixes for WLAN measurements I Q data Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt k gt 1 8 Limit R amp S FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements 10 2 10 2 1 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED Suffix Value range Description lt t gt 1 Trace lt m gt 1 4 Table 10 2 Common suffixes for frequency sweep measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 lt m gt 1 16 Marker lt ch gt 1 18 Tx channel Channel 1 11 ALTernate or ADJa cent channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by
151. length is within a specified range are considered The payload length is specified by the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MIN command A payload length range is defined as a minimum and maximum number of symbols the payload may contain see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MAX on page 277 and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MIN Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Equal PPDU Length on page 158 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MAX lt NumDataBytes gt If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the maximum number of data bytes allowed for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal command is set to true then this command has no effect Parameters lt NumDataBytes gt RST 64 Default unit bytes Manual operation See Min Max Payload Length on page 160 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MIN lt NumDataBytes gt For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS signals only If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal command is set to true then this command specifies the exact number of data bytes a PPDU must have to take part in measurement analysis If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the minimum number of data bytes required for a PPD
152. lt 5 _ 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPEe 300 DISPlay WINDow N TRACe t X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer esee 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer e lt gt lt gt 5 lt gt lt gt 5 lt gt lt gt 5 lt gt lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 lt gt lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO m lt gt lt gt 5 lt gt lt 1 1 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SC
153. maximum trace are displayed 8 Phase Error vs Preamble 1 Mine2 Avg e 3 Max 800 0 ns Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEVP see You NDow page 289 or on page 204 gu on page 205 Querying results 1 see chapter 10 9 4 9 Error vs Preamble on page 338 Phase Tracking Displays the average phase tracking result per symbol in Radians This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Phase Tracking FERNER Rx1 RX 2 3 1 Rx 1 Symb 1 64 6 Symb Symb 646 Symb 1 64 6 Symb Symb 646 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PTR see E IINDow on page 289 or igure B on page 205 Querying results see chapter 10 9 4 16 Phase Tracking on page 341 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 38 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays p Pp MU a P PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b g DSSS This result display shows the decoded data from the PLCP header of the PPDU This result display is only available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS for other standards use Signal Field instead I PLCP Header Signal 01110 Abit Fig 3 18 PLCP Header result display for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS standards The following information is provided The signal field information is provided as a decoded bit sequence
154. measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the 1 3yout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 10 7 3 Selecting Items to Display in Result Summary The following command defines which items are displayed in the Result Summary DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe ITEM lt Item gt lt State gt Defines which items are displayed in the Result Summary see Result Summary Detailed on page 44 and Result Summary Global on page 45 Configuring the Result Display Note that the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility in the Result Summary Parameters Item Item to be included in Result Summary For an overview of pos sible results and the required parameters see the tables below State ON OFF
155. mode the IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards are not supported Remote command CONFigure STANdard on page 209 Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 Tolerance Limit Defines the tolerance limit to be used for the measurement The required tolerance limit depends on the used standard Prior IEEE 802 11 2012 Standard Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11 specification prior to 2012 Default for OFDM standards except 802 1 1ac In line with IEEE 802 11 2012 Standard Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11 specification from 2012 Required for DSSS standards Also possible for OFDM standards except 802 11 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance In line with IEEE 802 11ac standard Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11ac specification Required by IEEE 802 11ac standard Remote command CALCulate LIMit TOLerance on page 210 5 3 3 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals Importing and Exporting Data The data to be analyzed for WLAN 802 11 can not only be measured by the WLAN application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the analyzed 1 0 data from the WLAN application c
156. of the Digital I Q input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital 1 TX device To solve the problem the Digital I Q connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored 4 Digital Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital I Q input module is erroneous Possible reasons e Biterrors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital I Q connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect 5 not used 6 Digital Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 7 not used Status Registers Bit No Meaning 8 Digital Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Output 9 Digital I Q Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection betw
157. on page 306 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt on page 306 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE on page 307 5 2 5 3 Display Configuration Display Configuration The measurement results can be displayed using various evaluation methods All eval uation methods available for the R amp S FSW WLAN application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Select the Display Config softkey in any WLAN menu Then you can drag one or more evaluations to the display area and configure the lay out as required Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The WLAN evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 To close the SmartGrid mode and
158. payload symbols of the PPDU it represents a carrier wise mean gain of the channel Assuming that we have a cable connection between the DUT and the R amp S FSW that adds no residual channel distortion the Spectrum Flatness shows the spectral distortion caused by the DUT for example the transmit filter This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS The diagram shows the relative power per carrier All carriers are displayed including the unused carrier s In contrast to the SISO measurements in previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spec trum analyzers the trace is no longer normalized to 0 dB scaled by the mean gain of all carriers 2 Spectrum Flatness Carrier 250 50 1 Carrier Carrier 250 For more information see chapter 4 3 6 Crosstalk and Spectrum Flatness on page 79 ODD SSSAH jo _ User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 50 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Spectrum Flatness Stream FRX 1 4 Stream 1 Rx 1 4 Stream 2 Rx 1 4 Stream 3 Rx 1 4 Stream 4 Rx 1 4 2 1 Stream L Rx 1 2 2 Stream 1 Rx 2 2 3 Stream 1 Rx 3 2 4 Stream 1 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr C Carrier 25 Carr rrier Carrier 25 Carr Carrier 25 Carr 2 5 Stream 2 Rx 1 2 6 Stream 2 Rx 2 2 7 Stream 2 Rx 3 2 8 Stream 2 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr Carrie Carrier 25 Carr Carrier Carrier 25 Carr C ner 25 Carr 2 9 Stream 3 Rx 1 2 10 Stream 3 Rx 2 2 11 S
159. restore the previous softkey menu select the 22 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flat ness Tolerance When you activate the WLAN application an measurement of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The WLAN menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for WLAN IQ measurements WLAN measurements can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu e Configuration OVEVICW ccccccecccecteeeeecceteeteeecceennedsecedsneetecdeaneteanecectneduesdersehnenee 94 e Sona Desernpllolt 95 e Inpuitand Frontend Settings 97 Signal Capture Data Actquisillon 2 o terere t etat petas ex des 121 e Application Data 137 e Synchronization and OFDM Demodulation incisis 137 Tracking and Channel 2 1 1 1 nnns 138 e Demodula
160. results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 13 FFT Spectrum on page 340 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 33 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Freq Error vs Preamble Displays the frequency error values recorded over the preamble part of the PPDU A minimum average and maximum trace are displayed 2 Freq Error vs Preamble 1 Mine 2 Avge 3 Ma 800 0 ns Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FEVP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt PREamble IMMediate on page 204 CONFigure BURSt PREamble SELect on page 205 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 9 Error vs Preamble page 338 Gain Imbalance vs Carrier Displays the minimum average and maximum gain imbalance versus carrier in individ ual traces For details on gain imbalance see chapter 3 1 1 2 Gain Imbalance on page 17 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 34 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Gain Imbalance vs Carrier 1 Mine 2 Avg Max Carrier 28 6 Carrier Carrier 28 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH GAIN see ow on page 289 Or 5 igure on page 204 Querying results See chapter 10 9 4 8 Error vs Carrier on page 338 Group Delay Displays all Group Delay GD values recorded on a per subcarrier basis over the number of analyzed PPDUs as defined by the Evaluation Range gt Stat
161. rete 155 Power ib oriri T A 155 User ecce 156 Spatial Mapping Mode Defines the mapping between streams and antennas For details see chapter 4 3 2 Spatial Mapping on page 73 Direct The mapping between streams and antennas is the identity matrix See also section 20 3 11 10 1 Spatial Mapping of the IEEE 802 11n WLAN standard Spatial For this mode all streams contribute to all antennas See also section Expansion 20 3 11 10 1 Spatial Mapping of the IEEE 802 11n WLAN standard User defined The mapping between streams and antennas is defined by the User Defined Spatial Mapping table Remote command CONFigure WLAN SMAPping MODE on page 264 Power Normalise Specifies whether an amplification of the signal power due to the spatial mapping is performed according to the matrix entries On Spatial mapping matrix is scaled by a constant factor to obtain a pas sive spatial mapping matrix which does not increase the total trans mitted power WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Off Normalization step is omitted Remote command CONFigure WLAN SMAPping NORMalise on page 264 User Defined Spatial Mapping Define your own spatial mapping between streams and antennas For each antenna Tx1 4 the complex element of each
162. returns the result of the average or maximum symbol clock error limit check The limit value is defined by the standard or the user See CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror MAXimum on page 283 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep Measurements The following commands are required to retrieve the numeric results of the WLAN fre quency sweep measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 51 In the following commands used to retrieve the numeric results for RF data the suf fixes n for CALCulate and lt k gt for LIMit are irrelevant lt gt 11 lt gt 322 lt gt 1 lt gt lt gt 5 322 GAL Gulateem LIMIEKSIEANE itae 323 lt gt lt gt lt 6 gt 324 CALCUlate 326 lt gt 5 lt gt 2 2 naar ra na saa ERA 326 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt A
163. signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval page 250 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again For more information on the drop out time see chapter 4 9 3 Trigger Drop Out Time on page 86 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 244 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement For more information see chapter 4 9 1 Trigger Offset on page 85 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset lt 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 244 Hysteresis Trigger Source Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB For more information see chapter 4 9 2 Trigger Hysteresis on page 85 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 245 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Settings Defines the minimu
164. standard If the start position of the PPDU is known the header of the PPDU can be demodula ted The bits transmitted in the header provide information about the length of the PPDU and the modulation type used in the PSDU Once the start position and the PPDU length are fully known better estimates of timing offset timing drift frequency offset and phase offset can be calculated using the entire data of the PPDU At this point of the signal processing demodulation can be performed without decision error After demodulation the normalized in terms of power and undisturbed reference signal s v is available If the frequency offset is not constant and varies with time the frequency offset and phase offset in several partitions of the PPDU must be estimated and corrected Addi tionally timing offset timing drift and gain factor can be estimated and corrected in several partitions of the PPDU These corrections can be switched off individually in the demodulation settings of the application Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS uoneums3 9 6 uoneulns3 uoneuins3 uoneuins3 ules eseug uogewnsa peuonnied peuonnied 291114 uonejejsuo jeubis Ol WAS 9 uajdwesey 2 uonoeuo 1 pueqeseg udi
165. stream to the Rx antenna effective channel are available as the mapping of the Rx antennas to the Tx antennas physical channel could not be determined For more information see chapter 4 3 3 Physical vs Effective Channels on page 74 R amp SSFSW K91 Configuration WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Spectrum Flatness Channel B 15 Spectrum Flatness Remote command CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness CSELect on page 298 5 3 10 3 Configuration For result displays some additional configuration settings are available General AM AM Settlhigs u icr cere terea needed et 163 e Scaling AM Result 220241 02 121 0 0000 1000100 164 General Settings For AM AM result displays the trace is determined by calculating a polynomial regres sion model for the scattered measurement vs reference signal data see on page 23 The degree of this model can be specified in the Result Config dialog box for this result display Result Config Scaling X Scaling Y AM AM Polynomial degree for curve fitting 27755117523 19 3 AM AM R amp S9FSW K91 Configuration The resulting regression polynomial is indicated in the window title of the result display Remote command 1 on page 298 Resulting coefficients s o
166. switch platform The DUT Tx antennas are connected with the analyzer via the R amp S OSP B101 module fitted in the OSP switch platform Select the R amp S OSP B101 module that is used for this connection Remote command CONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP MODule on page 256 Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture Note For sequential MIMO measurements the DUT has to transmit identical PPDUs over time The signal field for example has to be identical for all PPDUs For details see chapter 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement on page 76 For this MIMO method you must connect each Tx antenna of the WLAN DUT with the analyzer and start data capturing manually see chapter 5 3 12 Sweep Settings on page 168 The dialog box shows a preview of the capture memories one for each RX antenna The PPDUs detected by the application are highlighted by the green bars ODD A DPAA Ql oaAe XXNAIELpIOULAALLLHL a User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 135 R amp S9FSW K91 Configuration gt Signal Capture Trigger Source Trigger In Out MIMO Capture DUT MIMO Config 3 Tx Antennas 5 MIMO Antenna Signal Capture Setup Simultaneous Cal Sequential using OSP Switch Box om Sequential Manual Sequential Signal Capture Overview Rx 1 Capture Rx 2 Capture mc Rx 3 Capture Calc Results Clear All Magnitude Capture Buffers eR OO Capture Memory Rx 1 5 Remote command
167. the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt Example Activating WLAN Measurements Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 199 String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 199 INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional I Q Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt lt gt lt ChannelName2 gt Example Usage String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 199 String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 199 INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IOQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ An
168. to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 12 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt f lt f loat 134 float loat 142 float lt f loat 140 float ArrayOfFloat A 2 2 Data File Format iq tar lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt f
169. trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 115 10 5 4 3 MIMO Capture Settings The following commands are only available for IEEE 802 11ac n standards Useful commands for defining MIMO capture settings described elsewhere CALCulate n BURSt IMMediate on page 305 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Remote commands exclusive to defining MIMO capture settings lt gt 253 lt gt 001000100 253 5 0 0 253 5 lt 0 0 10 254 CON Figure WLAN DU TOGRIE sites etr ee ea ee ee leer 254 GON Figure WLANEMIMO GAP TUTE ceu oerte E EAE a Ea 254 1 255 CONFiguresWILANIMINOIGAPTUre it ceret cete tut tet caneret aea 255 GCONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP ADDR6GSS urea e ctun a
170. use on page 149 See PPDU Format on page 150 Table 10 5 Modulation format parameters for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p standard SCPI parameter Dialog parameter BPSK6 BPSK 1 2 BPSK9 BPSK 3 4 QPSK12 QPSK 1 2 QPSK18 QPSK 3 4 QAM1624 16 QAM 1 2 QAM1636 16 QAM 3 4 QAM6448 64 QAM 2 3 QAM6454 64 QAM 3 4 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Table 10 6 Modulation format parameters for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS standard SCPI parameter Dialog parameter CCK11 Complementary Code Keying at 11 Mbps CCK55 Complementary Code Keying at 5 5 Mbps DBPSK1 Differential Bl Phase shift keying DQPSK2 Differential Quadrature phase shift keying PBCC11 PBCC at 11 Mbps PBCC22 PBCC at 11 Mbps PBCC55 PBCC at 5 5 Mbps Table 10 7 Modulation format parameters for IEEE 802 11n standard SCPI parameter Dialog parameter BPSK65 Bl Phase shift keying at 6 5 Mbps BPSK72 Bl Phase shift keying at 7 2 Mbps QAM1626 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 26 Mbps QAM1639 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 39 Mbps QAM16289 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 28 9 Mbps QAM16433 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 43 3 Mbps QAM6452 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 52 Mbps QAM6465 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 65 Mbps QAM16289 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 28 9 Mbps QAM16433 Quadrature
171. will generate this message Hint PPDU dismissed due to a mismatch with the PPDU format to be analyzed The properties causing the mismatches for this PPDU are highlighted Hint PPDU dismissed due to truncation The first or the last PPDU was truncated during the signal capture process for exam ple Hint PPDU dismissed due to HT SIG inconsistencies One or more of the following HT SIG decoding results are outside of specified range MCS index Number of additional STBC streams Number of space time streams derived from MCS and STBC CRC Check failed Non zero tail bits Hint PPDU dismissed because payload channel estimation was not possible The payload based channel estimation was not possible because the channel matrix is singular to working precision Hint Channel matrix singular to working precision Channel equalizing for PPDU Length Detection fully and user compensated measure ment signal is not possible because the estimated channel matrix is singular to work ing precision Common Suffixes 10 Remote Commands for WLAN Measure ments The following commands are required to perform measurements in the R amp S FSW WLAN application in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are independant of the application are not described here For a description of such task
172. 0 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 102 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 103 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 103 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3
173. 00 136 Capture offset MSRA applications 123 129 137 Remote Softkey Capture time Displayed see also Measurement time 242 Carriers AGUNG 80 CCDF Configuring applications Results Trace dala eterna rers ebrei Center frequency Analog Baseband B71 EOT Aik ee ieri qe Channel Estimating Estimating IEEE 802 11 OFDM j p 64 Channel bandwidth MSRAUITOS L nacti dedic 89 Channel bandwidth CBW PPDU vies 142 143 145 146 149 151 152 266 Channel bar Displayed information 14 Channel estimation Remote Gontro 257 Channel power AGIR i eene 52 Channels ActiVe CatTiGl S oett toe Dente e tmp ede 80 AWGN IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j 60 mend 74 Physical reet metre 74 Closing Channels remote Windows remote Compensating IEEE 802 11a 63 Payload window IEEE 802 11 OFDM j p 60 Compensation
174. 00000 8 5000000 7 5000000 1 0000000 2 1090000 8 1585472 7 9841690 3 08416 0 0 0 00 00 006 00 006 00 006 64 009 11 001 06 001 9006 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 3 3 0000000 7 5000000 3 5000000 1 0000000 2 1139872 4 2027084 4 0283302 5 27056 0 0 0 00 00 006 00 006 00 006 00 009 35E 001 31E 001 5033 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input A Annex Reference A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the device connected to the input of the R amp S FSW User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output Usable I Q Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Record length Number of I Q samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate For the data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally in the R
175. 0000000100 000000009 352 STATus QUEStiOnable ACPLimit N TRANSIGON avessen a 353 STATUs QUEStonabl AGPLIMIEP TRANSHION cis 353 5 lt 2 2190001000000000000000000000 351 STATus QUESItionable CONDILUO R iiec reet rne a a d EVE XY p 352 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition 5 01 STATus QUEStiOnable DIO N TRANSOM oiu totu a an eb e tpe etate det eas S TATUs QUEStIonable DIQ P TRAFSIEOL iia ccm c Er trea e npo Vera cea EE dug STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt einer trn pner rtr EEEE NE RAK ESEE EEA a 350 STATus QUESItionable ENABIG erepti ep vat ete ve evt ein yr E EN eames 352 STATUs QUEStionable LIMitsn gt CONDITION oce eee ctor ee eset tea 352 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition 5 0 lt lt gt 1 20100 000000 000000000000 352 STATus QUEStionable MTRaALFiSIlOni 2c tco era tropa rU ct od pe sd Pug 353
176. 146 149 151 152 266 Count r rmote recto eee Ce ets 309 Currently analyzed nente 13 15 Detrnodulatlon 3 3 1 ire rerit ecco cete eheu 141 Displayed ee EVM Direct 20 Extension Spatial Streams IEEE 802 11 n 153 261 FOftn l encor tte ets 142 145 149 151 Format remote nete 268 269 Guard interval length IEEE 802 11 n ac 148 154 262 263 Length aea aiea 311 Level errors 140 258 259 Maximum length remote 279 Minimum length remote 280 Modulatioli 143 269 Modulation IEEE 802 11 144 150 Modulation IEEE 802 11 146 152 Modulation remote 1 2 ret tne 354 Ness IEEE 802 11 n 153 261 147 Nsts IEEE 802 11 ac 147 272 N tmber to analyze 276 Number to analyze 276 Payload length 158 160 Payload length remote 274 Phase drift 140 259 Physical Channel eere Pilots POWGM p Power search Recognized Selectirigi toto terere Selecting remote
177. 255 Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup For each RX antenna from which data is to be captured simultaneously the settings are configured here WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance LAN Status Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup The LED symbol indicates the LAN connection state for each individual antenna except for the master Table 5 2 Meaning of LED colors Color State gray antenna off or IP address not available valid red antenna on and IP address valid but not accessible green antenna on and IP address accessible State Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup Switches the corresponding slave analyzer or off In On state the slave analyzer captures data This data is transferred via LAN to the master for analysis of the MIMO system Remote command CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix STATe antenna on page 254 Analyzer IP Address Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup Defines the IP addresses of the slaves connected via LAN to the master Remote command CONFigure WLAN ANTMatrix ADDRess add on page 253 Assignment Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup Assignment of the expected antenna to an analyzer For a wired connection the assignment of the Tx antenna connected to the analyzer is a possibility For a wired connection and Direct Spatial Mapping the Spectrum Flatness traces in the diagonal contain the useful information in case the signal transmitted from the antennas
178. 60 Adjacent channel leakage ratio Seg ACER acce ad ONE anatase 52 Adjacent channels Filtering OUt irit eaten 123 242 AM AM Polynomial degree ness a OS EORR TNR REO 163 Result displays AM EVM Isesult displays FOR TEIL 24 Trace data iiris E E 335 AM PM Is Sult displays 24 Trace data E 335 Amplitude Configuration remote Configuration softkey E Analog Baseband 100 Inp t settifigS oro roro ecco Mes ts 111 Analog Baseband B71 VQ mode Input type remote control Analog Baseband Interface B71 INPUU SCUINGS N 111 Analysis Bandwidth definition 2 361 Remote control RF measurements SSNS m C Analysis interval Analysis URN ERROR rac MMC NEIN Antennas Assignment MIMO 133 Mapping MIMO icira teni 156 MIMO settings 21392 OSP switch box 135 State MIMO 132 Applications Adopted parameters wisi suco cx nen es 93 SWITCHING onte eee 93 120 Auto 120 Electronic 120 Manual 120 folo aE E 120 Protective EE Dm 82 Protective remote recette 211 Auto ID Ex
179. 98 Constellation 27 Constellation vs carrier 4 29 Diagram enne 2 56 Evaluated 156 EVM VSCalTIGE 2 ha 30 EVM vs chip Mn EVM VS Symbol 2 ther erret rte 31 FFT SDOCIFU ccrte 32 Freq Error vs Preamble 2 34 Gain Imbalance vs Carrier 34 Group Delay 00 Magnitude Capture 4 36 Marker table na OO PEAK IST aie o e ee Re e thse auus 57 vs Preamble e 38 Phase Tracking 2598 PvT Falling Edge 42 Full PPDU 2 40 Rising Edge 2 41 Quad Error vs Carrier 2 43 S rmmary 56 Result Summary Detailed 44 Result Summary Global 2 45 Result Summary items 161 Result Summary items remote 296 see also Evaluation methods anis Signal Field 2 47 Signal Field K91 91n 39 Spectrum Flatiess nero etn 50 WLAN receta Daten 22 Result Summary Detailed result display 44 Evaluation method 4 56 Global result display 45 Items to display 1 nnne rte 161 Items to display remote 296 Result display Trace data eere dni eH eR Results utr edi cepe oat etes AM EVM
180. A TTT TTT TT TT 0 0 0 3 5 YA Option B28 U28 Without BW 10 extension options or B8 Output sample 10000 fon MHz 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 1 1 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions A 1 4 R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 10 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input Table 1 2 Maximum I Q bandwidth Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz MSRA master 10 MHz to 600 MHz A 1 5 R amp S FSW with options B28 U28 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz MSRA master 35 MHz to 600 MHz A 1 6 R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum
181. ALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer lt gt lt gt 0 0 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh essen lt gt lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 1 lt gt lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 5 lt gt lt gt gt 238 BISPlayEWINDowsriz ZOOM AREA nri rtt tr nennen reet er rr cer tr dede tear 345 lt gt lt 2 gt 346 lt gt 7 lt 200 gt 5 346 gt 7 5 rtt trn rrr retenir rere e 345 FETCh BURSt ALL FETCH
182. ATS rpreeeetrr padece tere anina e Ra qa Ud 328 lt gt 329 TRACE SM T 331 4422 22 331 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Retrieving Results Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting UINT In the R amp S FSW WLAN application bitstream data can be sent as unsigned integers format to improve the data transfer speed compared to ASCII format RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confi
183. Amplitude Modulation at 43 3 Mbps QAM64578 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 57 8 Mbps QAM64585 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 58 5 Mbps QAM64722 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 72 2 Mbps QPSK13 Quadrature phase shift keying at 13 Mbps QPSK144 Quadrature phase shift keying at 14 4 Mbps QPSK195 Quadrature phase shift keying at 19 5 Mbps QPSK217 Quadrature phase shift keying at 21 7 Mbps SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE lt Analysis gt This remote control command specifies how signals are analyzed Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Analysis gt Example FBURst MMIX MGRF DMIX DGRF MNHT DNHT FBURst The format of the first valid PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUS are analyzed only if they have the same format corre sponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their format corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MNHT Only PPDUs with format Non HT are analyzed IEEE 802 11a g OFDM p DNHT All PPDUs are assumed to have the PPDU format Non HT IEEE 802 11a g OFDM p MMIX Only PPDUs with format HT MF Mixed are analyzed IEEE 802 11 n MGRF Only PPDUs with format HT GF Greenfield are analyzed IEEE 802 11 n DMIX All PPDUs are assumed to have the PPDU format HT MF IEEE 802 11 n DGRF All PPDUs are assumed to have the
184. Bols MAX lt NumDataSymbols gt For IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p signals only If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the maximum number of payload symbols allowed for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis The number of payload symbols is defined as the uncoded bits including service and tail bits If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command has been set to true then this command has no effect Parameters lt NumDataSymbols gt RST 64 Manual operation See Min Max No of Data Symbols on page 158 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN lt NumDataSymbols gt For IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p signals only If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command has been set to true then this command specifies the exact number of payload symbols a PPDU must have to take part in measurement analysis If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the minimum number of payload symbols required for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis The number of payload symbols is defined as the uncoded bits including service and tail bits Parameters lt NumDataSymbols gt RST 1 Example SENS DEM FORM BAN SYMB EQU
185. CALOCulate n UNIT POWer CALibration AlQ HATiming STATe GONFigure BURSCEAM AM POLY noOtmilal oen tht tre tr erret tk eri ch PE eaa GONFigure BURSEAM AMEIMMedlate corr tn pere ouo ETEO ERE eR RM ECC GONFigure BURSEAM EVMEIMMABdiate 5 ten tno ttn tui ren GONFigure BURStAM PMEIMMeglate 5 6 ron cre ttr rnt rere N a CONFigure BURSCtCONSEtCCARrier IMMediate not trente enr innt rcnt CONFigure BURSt CONSE CSYMbol IMMediate 2 55 tnnt nn nro tn GONFigure BURStEVM ECARTIer IMMediate tton nen tht inr GONFigure BURSCEEVM ECHIp IMMedi te roro ore teet rg ge ptg ev rra ee ena GONFigure BURStEVM ESYMbol IMMediate t trennt a CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS CONFigure BURStGAIN GCARrier IMMediate eee tnter nnn nnne tutta un eret ner n dne rn P en pae n apne eats GONFigure BURStPREamble IMMediate 2 5 notre tr rennen hnnc GONFigure BURSEtP TRAcking IMMedial ona ren ea enn eer p Eg eene kn ooh te etr CONFigure BURSEPV T AVERa9g6 tpe enn nene nen T GONFigure BURSEPV T RPOMWMLBL teniente FER Re ERE DERE e FERMER RE E RENTEN CONFigure BURSt P
186. CONF BURS SPEC FLAT SEL FLAT Configures the result display of window 2 to be Spectrum Flat ness CONF BURS SPEC FLAT IMM Performs a default WLAN measurement When the measure ment is completed the Spectrum Flatness results are displayed Usage Event Manual operation See Group Delay on page 35 See Spectrum Flatness on page 50 Selecting a Measurement CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display in window 2 to be Spectrum Flatness or Group Delay depending on which result display was selected last using CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness SELect on page 206 Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Example CONF BURS SPEC FLAT SEL FLAT Configures the result display of window 2 to be Spectrum Flat ness CONF BURS SPEC FLAT IMM Performs a default WLAN measurement When the measure ment is completed the Spectrum Flatness results are displayed Usage Event Manual operation See Group Delay on page 35 See Spectrum Flatness on page 50 CONFigure BURSt STATistics BSTReam IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be Bit stream Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Bitstream on page 25 CO
187. CPower ACHannel RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate chan nels in an ACLR measurement lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 305 Suffix lt ch gt 1 to 11 Alternate channel number Retrieving Results Return values lt LowerChan gt text value lt UpperChan gt The command returns two results The first is the result for the lower the second for the upper adjacent or alternate channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed Example INIT IMM WAI CALC LIM ACP ACH RES PASSED PASSED Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check in the specified window For measurements in the R amp S FSW WLAN application the numeric suffix lt k gt speci fies the limit line according to table 10 12 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 305 Return values l
188. DU in the range of 0 to 65 535 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameter Description SNRA Smoothing Not Sounding Reserved Aggregation Smoothing 1 channel estimate smoothing is recommended 0 only per carrier independent unsmoothed channel estimate is recommended Not Sounding 1 PPDU is not a sounding PPDU 0 PPDU is a sounding PPDU Reserved Set to 1 Aggregation 1 PPDU in the data portion of the packet contains an AMPDU 0 otherwise STBC Space Time Block Coding 00 no STBC NSTS NSS 0 the difference between the number of spacetime streams NSTS and the number of spatial streams NSS indicated by the MCS Gl Guard interval length PPDU must have to be measured 1 short used after HT training 0 otherwise Ness Number of extension spatial streams Ness see Extension Spatial Streams sounding on page 153 CRC Cyclic redundancy code of bits 0 23 HT SIG1 and bits 0 9 HT SIG2 Tail Bits Used to terminate the trellis of the convolution coder Set to 0 The values for the individual demodulation parameters are described in chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation on page 141 The following abbreviations are used in the Signal Field table Table 3 8 Abbreviations for demodulation parameters shown in Signal Field display Abbreviation in Signal Parameter in Demodulation settings Field display Aist Auto same type
189. DUS are analyzed This setting is automatically selected when any of the subsequent settings are changed to a value other than Auto Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONtent AUTO on page 271 PPDU Format to measure Defines which PPDU formats are to be included in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different formats of PPDUs are availa ble Thus you can restrict analysis to the supported formats Note The PPDU format determines the available channel bandwidths For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The format of the first valid PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same format Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their format Meas only M Only PPDUS with the specified format are analyzed Demod all as D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified PPDU format Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat 1 on page 268 Channel Bandwidth to measu
190. DUs for each of the subcarriers Each gain imbalance quadrature error value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of dB Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii UINT Error vs Preamble Three traces types are available for frequency or phase error measurement The basic trace types show either the minimum mean or maximum frequency or phase value as measured over the preamble part of the PPDU Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii REAL EVM vs Carrier Three trace types are provided for this evaluation Retrieving Results Table 10 16 Query parameter and results for EVM vs Carrier TRACE1 The minimum EVM value over the analyzed PPDUs for each of the Nyseq subcarriers TRACE2 The average EVM value over the analyzed PPDUs for each of the subcarriers TRACE3 The maximum EVM value over the analyzed PPDUs for each of the subcarriers Each EVM value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of dB Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii UINT Example For EVM the EVM of the m th analyzed PPDU for the subcarrier n 1 2 TRACE1 Minimum EVM value per subcarrier EVMstatistic Length 1 Minimum EVM value for subcarrier Nuseq 1 2 2 EVM 2 EVMstatistic Length 2
191. DataFilename lt UserData gt Data File Format iq tar lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies
192. Defines 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 120 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 120 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO page 240 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 120 Co
193. E 274 274 GONFigure WI AN PVERroEMRANGg6 arredato kara eH VEA Te Fe Ra 275 SENSE IBURSUGOL ND emend aa A A AAEE 275 SENSeJ BURSEGOLNEBS TATG 1i pair e baee ce pape or e Ere npe erar n 276 I SENSe BURSEUSELBOL iced reet e Eee ete estat nebat exe e pde d qu ed Re REEL 276 SENSe I BURSESEEGGESTATOQ ii ineo ieu aae itg onte SAED 276 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal essen 277 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes MAX esses 277 60 277 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal eese 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MAX cessisse nnne 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN eese 278 5 0 279 4 5 15 2 2 4 444414444 6 279 5
194. E MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM in dB for the IEEE 802 11b standard This result is the value before filtering For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt CFERror AVERage FETCh BURSt CFERror MAXimum FETCh BURSt CFERror MINimum FETCh BURSt FERRor AVERage FETCh BURSt FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSt FERRor MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum center frequency errors in Hertz For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt Global Result Stream 1 result Stream n result Usage Query only FETCh BURSt GIMBalance AVERage FETCh BURSt GIMBalance MAXimum FETCh BURSt GIMBalance MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum I Q imbalance in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt IQOFfset AVERage FETCh BURSt IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh BURSt IQOFfset MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum offset in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt EVM ALL AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM ALL MINimum This
195. EGEMAXIUE eater nnne pde 315 FETCH BURSEEVM IPIEGEMINIFAUITI e band aden 315 EEE AVERAGE dera 316 FETCh BURSEEVMEIEEE MJAXIRISITIT 22222 citro a anoo Co po sre a erre 316 FETCh BURSEEVMEPIEEE MINIPYUER 222552222 receptae pn eius er ppt 316 FETCI BURSEOCPERIOEAVERaAdge iint eel 316 FETCh BURSECFERrTOIEMAXIUM EL eo e e hin E Rd 316 Retrieving Results FETOIB RSEGFERrIOEMINITIDD 5 tic 316 FEICHBURSEFERROEAVERAUGD 2 intu EA EE EARTE EREE 316 FETGHBURSEFERROEMAXIIIIITI 7 tuner yeso e 316 FETGISBURSEFERROEMIBIFRUTES acria e nope du ertet ette has ati abend dede 316 FETChIBURSEGIMBalance AVERage 2 1 eve v Lace eR RA Pe 316 5 2 316 5 316 316 FETCHh BURSEIQOFfseEMAXIIUII 1 i cria a 316
196. ENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel 10 5 2 3 Configuring Digital I Q Input and Output Useful commands for digital data described elsewhere INP SEL see INPut SELect on page 213 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 245 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp
197. ENS BURS COUN 10 Determine payload length from HT signal CONF WLAN PAYL LENG SRC HTS Payload length 8 16 symbols SENS DEM FORM BAN SYMB EQU OFF SENS DEM FORM BAN SYMB MIN 8 SENS DEM FORM BAN SYMB MAX 16 Measurement settings Define units for EVM and Gain imbalance results UNIT EVM PCT UNIT GIMB PCT Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN application Defining Limits Define non standard limits for demonstration purposes and return to standard limits later Query current limit settings CALC LIM BURS ALL Set new limits Average CF error 5HZ max CF error 10HZ average symbol clock error 5 max symbol clock error 10 average I Q offset 5 maximum I Q offset 10 average EVM all carriers 0 1 max EVM all carriers 0 5 average EVM data carriers 0 1 max EVM data carriers 0 5 average EVM pilots 0 1 max EVM pilots 0 5 CALCTLIM BURStALL 5 10 5 10 5 10 0 1 0 5 0 1 0 5 0 1 0 5 Performing the Measurements Run 10 blocking single measurements INITiate IMMediate Retrieving Results Query the I Q data from magnitude capture buffer for first ms 200 000 samples per second gt 200 samples 1 10 0 200 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the I Q d
198. ERPilot MAXimum FETCh BURSt BERPilot MINimum This command returns the Bit Error Rate BER for Pilots average maximum or mini mum value in for the IEEE 802 11n MIMO standard For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Usage Query only FETCh BURSt CPERror AVERage FETCh BURSt CPERror MAXimum FETCh BURSt CPERror MINimum This command returns the common phase error average maximum or minimum value in degrees for the IEEE 802 11n MIMO standard For details see chap ter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Parameters lt Result gt Stream 1 result Stream n result FETCh BURSt CRESt AVERage FETCh BURSt CRESt MAXimum FETCh BURSt CRESt MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt EVM ALL AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM ALL MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM ALL MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM in dB This is a com bined figure that represents the pilot data and the free carrier Retrieving Results For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness
199. EW 2 reiecit 197 2 1 A aaa S daa aa RR Sai 198 INS Tramite a poten naa eut Ie 198 18 2 Rr DO M PO 199 INSTr mentRENSm 2 200 INS Tiumen SELEG teen ceeds Ett Ro Ee reb t rn eite Frasi edt erae nne Pan 200 SYSTemiPRESeECHANnsIEEXEQCUE treat ra ceca eura teer uet 201 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at
200. Example X is the trial parameter of x nof symbols 1 Af es gt k 21 7 7 21 imi 2 E xp common g LS J phase phase xH xe with phase 25x Af xl phase 9 225 x N Nx xkxl Log likelihood function step 1 4 4 The trial parameters leading to the minimum of the log likelihood function are used as estimates Af In Log likelihood function step 1 the known pilot symbols are read from a table In the second step the log likelihood function is calculated for every symbol as a func tion of the trial parameters 8 and TM gt timin g LS J Bhasd phase ny a Xg xH xe Ly g dy 3 k 21 7 7 21 with phase 2 xl dy 2 Log likelihood function step 2 4 5 Finally the trial parameters leading to the minimum of the log likelihood function are used as estimates and 97 This robust algorithm works well even at low signal to noise ratios with the Cramer Rao Bound being reached Compensation After estimation of the parameters the sequence is compensated in compensa tion blocks In the upper analyzing branch the compensation is user defined i e the user deter mines which of the parameters are compensated This is useful in order to extract the influence of these parameters The resulting
201. FORMat BANalyze DURation MAX on page 278 PVT Average Length Defines the number of samples used to adjust the length of the smoothing filter for PVT measurement For details see PvT Full PPDU on page 40 Remote command CONFigure BURSt PVT AVERage on page 274 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance PVT Reference Power Sets the reference for the rise and fall time in PVT calculation to the maximum or mean PPDU power For details see PvT Full PPDU on page 40 Remote command CONFigure BURSt PVT RPOWer on page 274 Peak Vector Error Meas Range Displays the used measurement range for peak vector error measurement for refer ence only All Symbols Vector Error results are calculated over the complete PPDU PSDU only Peak Vector Error results are calculated over the PSDU only Remote command CONFigure WLAN PVERror MRANge on page 275 5 3 10 Result Configuration For some result displays additional settings are available The Result Configuration softkey in the main WLAN menu opens the Result Con figuration dialog box This softkey is only available if a window with additional settings is currently selected Alternatively select a window from the Specifics for selection list in the Overview then select the Result Configuration button to display the Result Configuration dia log box Depending on the selected result display different sett
202. FT OFES t ette io ct Cae a SENSe IBEMOQG FORMAaEBANAaIyzG SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe 00000000000 269 5 2 277 0 277 277 ISENS 0 278 00 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN 5 5 279 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX essen ener eren 279 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN eese meer 280 end 271 SENSe DEMod FORMatMGSindex MODE va dcin ci dece eate ceca nana annie A EY WEE ENS 271 SENSe IDEMod FORMAaENSTSInd6ex eiit e t a 272 SENSe IDEMOG FORMAatNSISindeX MODE a 272 SENS
203. Fs 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 EZ Go at Ge Gt Gat Qt Gy at HT greenfield format PPDU 1 3 Data HT LTFs Extension HT LTFs Fig 4 4 Training fields TF in the preamble of PPDUs in IEEE 802 11n standard The effective channel is sufficient to calculate the EVM the constellation diagram and the bitstream results of the measured signal so these results are always available The physical channel refers to the transmission path starting from the transmit antenna streams and ending at the receive antenna It is the product of the following components the crosstalk inside the device under test DUT transmission paths the crosstalk of the channel between the transmit antennas and the receive anten nas R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics The physical channel is derived from the effective channel using the inverted spatial mapping matrix Q Hohy Thus if the spatial mapping matrix cannot be inverted the physical channel cannot be calculated This may be the case for example if the signal contains fewer streams than Rx antenna signals or if the spatial matrix is close to numerical singularity In this case results that are based on the transmit antenna such as 1 0 offset gain imbalance and quadrature offset are not available Crosstalk in estimated channels 6 Note that the estimated channel transfer function contains crosstalk from various sou
204. G SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Time Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Trigger Level Mode Trigger Source Settings By default the optimum trigger level for power triggers is automatically measured and determined at the start of each sweep for Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance measurements In order to define the trigger level manually switch to Manual mode Remote command TRIG SEQ LEV POW AUTO ON see TRIGger SEQuence LEVel POWer AUTO on page 247 Trigger Level Trigger Source Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 246 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 246 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 245 For analog baseband or digital baseband input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 245 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 247 Repetition Interval Trigger Source Settings Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive
205. Guard Interval Length Auto same type as first PPDU 2 Fig 5 5 Demodulation settings for IEEE 802 11n standard PPDU Analysis 975 151 PPDU Format to measUte io terrier 151 Channel Bandwidth to measure CBW sse 152 MOS Index tO USE oiu 152 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Pes NON EE 153 ates sheen 153 Extension Spatial Streams sounding 153 A te 154 Guard Interval Length n ient cb tte qr FE EE Pad Fed EE Poe aea PLE De 154 PPDU Analysis Mode Defines whether all or only specific PPDUs are to be analyzed Auto same type as first PPDU The signal symbol field i e the PLCP header field of the first recog nized PPDU is analyzed to determine the details of the PPDU All PPDUS identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed All subsequent settings are set to Auto mode Auto individually for each PPDU All PPDUs are analyzed User defined User defined settings define which PPDUs are analyzed This setting is automatically selected when any of the subsequent settings are changed to a value other than Auto Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONtent AUTO on page 271
206. How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application 179 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for WLAN EJ 179 How to Analyze WLAN Signals a MIMO Measurement Setup 181 How to Determine the OBW SEM ACLR or CCDF for WLAN Signals 186 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 188 Optimizing the Measurement Results eene 188 Error Messages Warnings eese enne nnne 189 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements 191 191 Introduction etie E E eee 192 Activating WLAN Measurements esee nnne nnne nennen 197 Selecting a 201 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tol 511511152 ss 209 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements WLAN Signals 286 Configuring the Result Display eene nennen nnns 288 Starting a 2 nn RAE rua 304 Retrieving Results onmi terrere
207. IEEE 802 11b g DSSS FFT Spectrum Returns the power vs frequency values obtained from the FFT This is an exhaustive call due to the fact that there are nearly always more FFT points than samples The number of FFT points is a power of 2 that is higher than the total number of I Q samples i e number of FFT points round number of I Q samples to next power of 2 E g if there were 20000 samples then 32768 FFT points are returned Data is returned in floating point format in dBm Group Delay Currently the following trace types are provided with this measurement TRACE1 A repeating list of group delay values for each subcarrier The number of repeating lists corresponds to the number of fully analyzed PPDUs as displayed in the cur rent Magnitude Capture Each group delay value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of seconds TRACE All group delay values per subcarrier for each analyzed PPDU of the capture period 10 9 4 15 10 9 4 16 10 9 4 17 Retrieving Results Example For GDmn the group delay of the m th analyzed PPDU for the subcarrier correspond ing to n 1 2 Nusea X TRACE DATA TRACE2 Analyzed PPDU 1 1 xy Analyzed PPDU 2 1 Analyzed PPDU GDy Magnitude Capture Returns the magnitude for each measurement point as measured over the complete capture period The number of measurement
208. INIMUIN rtr e trn n re tee Fr ERR 315 DEDI erue sa Eert 316 FETCh BURSt EVM IEEE MAXimum FETCh BURSEEVME IEEETMINimUm ient rn ere rt eaaet tt 316 suas coc ITI eua 316 FETCRh BURSEFERROrFMAXIIDUITI ssec ttp err rp en rng en ce en RR ee vex e 316 FETCh BURSEFERRotMINim tm 1i nter rn ere eraat trece tat noinen sober o ER REESE ed 316 316 FETCh BURSEGIMBalance MAXIITIUIm iie tr trente xd Ea etr ERE KR 316 FETCh BURSEGIMBalanece MINimutm 2 eiae eee ctn 316 FETCIh BURSEIOOFISSEAVEROAGG 2 316 FETCI BURSCIQOFfsekEMAXIIUTI acr ttp e ce tnt p det well e pn e 316 FETCh BURStIQOFPset MINIMUM ccsccscscscesccsssssetecsscssencenecessnsenscssnnsersecenssneanssaneseanesnecesaaeennesnseersesens 316 FETCI BURSEEENGIS itr rentre eorr o e vette e Po EN ee YS PER Ee E Xe RT ER 310 FETGh B RSEMCPOWSBEAVERGAGB irte enc osa iere ca o E E Y PERRO EC rA tree Ver 317
209. INN 254 s d N M99 ay ui eunjonags JoquiAS SL 0L 1 Retrieving Results 96 22 uonenbe 2 02 L za oerrzogd 3331 9 56 22 uonenbe 2 02 20 8 rzogd 3331 s 6 uonenbe 2 02 uo1ew 3331 p 65 02 uonenbe 2 02 11 208 PIS 3991 0L OL zz uonoes ZLOZ YEW L ZQ oer 3991 Z sJeuueoqns jolld 0711 6702 uonoes zLOZ LL z09 PIS 3331 621 421 1 02 291 GEL LLL uoo peje eJ Buiuul G zz 9 qe ezL 68 GZ 92 9 68 2 ZLOZ YEW L 3991 LL LOS 621 2 vev 6EL LOL 0Z LEZ 9L 897 091 Sjueis uoo pejejoJ Buiuil g zz e qe L 1601 57 ZLOZ YEN 2084 3991 LL 04 LL LL 6 GZ 01L3 8 vec 99 08 dSN JOU og 8303 p sny 18 9S jeoqns a 9s Jo 25 jo id 5s 8 30 ON ON ON JO ON ZHN jueuiuio2 ASN 9s dS ashy An M99 10 9 4 1 10 9 4 2 10 9 4 3 10 9 4 4 Retrieving Results JAMUNM Meta ete ee 335
210. LAN measurements Analysis for RF measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the WLAN application For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual LM c CE 344 e Zooming mto the DiS Pia y tct en nt 345 Analysis 10 10 1 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Currently only 1 marker per window can be configured for standard WLAN measurements CALCulate n MARKer mo STATe 2 1 344 GAL Culate lt n MARKGPSIM Sty Piccesccssicceccesasacaacactaseatsanctsoesassasteasssdactscccsauevanccesenassecencaeaees 344 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurem
211. LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 10 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 200 LAY out ADD PII pro M 289 LAY cut CATalog WINDONIE EE aA E 292 LAYGoutIDENUVEWINDOW IQ c adage operto erar 293 WINDOW ensisi aea eee vaca ee dena endorses 293 LAY OUEREP Lace WINDOW 2 2 ex eee exce erp Era nire ds 293 LA VOUS PLING order irrita eet ee reae viua ne ae t RETO MEER A ETE 294 LAY oU WINDOWS ADD 295 LAYO WINDOWS AS IDENY Pi 22 10222 2 295 lt gt enn
212. LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Or CONFigure BURSt PVT SELect on page 205 CONFigure BURSt PVT IMMediate on page 205 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 17 Power vs Time PVT on page 341 PvT Falling Edge Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time diagram for the falling edge of all PPDUs User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 42 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Falling 1 Mine 2 Avg e 3 Max j 168 5 us 178 5 us Fig 3 23 PvT Falling Edge result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PFAL see 12 on page 289 or on page 205 jure on page 205 Querying results see chapter 10 9 4 17 Power vs Time PVT on page 341 Quad Error vs Carrier Displays the minimum average and maximum quadrature offset error v versus carrier in traces For details on quadrature offset see chapter 3 3 Quadrat on page 18 2 Quad Error vs Carrier 1 Mine 2 Avg Carrier 28 6 Carrier Carrier 28 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH QUAD see ow page 289 or i gt on page 206 Querying results see chapter 10 9 4 8 Error vs Carrier on page 338 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 43 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Result Summary Detailed The detailed result summary contains individual measurem
213. Le AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer page 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer on page 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer on page 300 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer on page 301 Minimum Maximum Defines the minimum and maximum value to be displayed on the x axis or y axis of the specified evaluation diagram For automatic scaling with a fixed range see Auto Fix Range the minimum defines the fixed lower limit the maximum defines the fixed upper limit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 302 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum page 303 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Memory Depth For automatic scaling based on memory see Auto Mode on page 165 this value defines the number lt x gt of previous results to be considered when determining if rescaling is required The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds the maximum of the lt x gt previous results and the upper limit is not fixed the x axis or y axis is rescaled If the minimum value in the c
214. Le MAXimum Max Defines the maximum value to be displayed on the x axis or y axis of the specified evaluation diagram For automatic scaling with a fixed range see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 299 the maximum defines the fixed upper limit Suffix lt n gt 1 Configuring the Result Display lt t gt 1 Parameters lt Max gt Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 100 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe MINimum Min DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Min Defines the minimum value to be displayed on the x axis or y axis of the specified eval uation diagram For automatic scaling with a fixed range see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 299 the minimum defines the fixed lower limit Suffix n 1 n lt gt 1 Parameters lt Min gt Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 20 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt State_1 gt lt State_2 gt lt State_2 5 State 5 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt Multiple gt lt Multiple gt Determines the values shown for each division on the x axis or y axis in the specified window One or more multiples of 10 can be selected The R amp S FSW WLAN applic
215. MHz TRAC 5 20MHZ Number of samples captured per measurement 0 01s 20e6 samples per second 200 000 samples Include effects from adjacent channels switch off filter BAND FILT OFF Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN application fs Synchronization Improve performance perform coarse burst search initially SENS DEM TXAR ON Minimize the intersymbol interference FFT start offset determined automatically SENS DEM FFT OFFS AUTO Tracking and channel estimation Improve EVM accuracy estimate channel from preamble and payload SENS DEM CEST ON Use pilot sequence as defined in standard SENS TRAC PIL STAN Disable all tracking and compensation functions SENS TRAC LEV OFF SENS TRAC PHAS OFF SENS TRAC TIME OFF Demodulation Define a user defined logical filter to analyze SENS DEM FORM BCON AUTO OFF 11 PPDU formats SENS DEM FORM BAN BTYP AUTO TYPE ALL 20MHZ channel bandwidth SENS BAND CHAN AUTO TYPE MB20 an MCS Index 11 SENS DEM FORM MCS MODE MEAS SENS DEM FORM MCS 1 STBC field 1 CONF WLAN STBC AUTO TYPE Ness 1 CONF WLAN EXT AUTO TYPE 1 short guard interval length 8 samples CONF WLAN GTIM AUTO CONF WLAN GTIM AUTO TYPE MS a Evaluation range settings Calculate statistics over 10 PPDUs SENS BURS COUN STAT ON S
216. Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 103 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 103 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 103 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 103 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 103 Configuring th
217. NFigure BURSt STATistics SFleld IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be Sig nal Field Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b DSSS on page 39 See Signal Field on page 47 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Selecting a Measurement Usage Setting only 10 4 2 Selecting a Common RF Measurement for WLAN Signals The following commands are required to select a common RF measurement for WLAN signals in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measure ments on page 51 The selected measurement must be started explicitely see chapter 10 8 Starting a Measurement on page 304 5 208 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum MASK IMMediate eese 208 208 1 4 209 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum ACPR
218. NSTS 1 Manual operation See Nsts to use on page 147 SENSe DEMod FORMat SIGSymbol lt State gt Activates and deactivates signal symbol field decoding For IEEE 802 11b this command can only be queried as the decoding of the signal field is always performed for this standard Parameters for setting and query lt State gt OFF Deactivates signal symbol field decoding All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified PPDU format PSDU modula tion regardless of the actual format or modulation ON If activated the signal symbol field of the PPDU is analyzed to determine the details of the PPDU Only PPDUs which match the PPDU type PSDU modulation defined by SENSe DEMod FORMat 1 and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe are considered in results analysis RST OFF Example DEM FORM SIGS Manual operation PPDU Format to measure PSDU Modulation to use on page 149 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 10 5 8 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display Note that as opposed to manual operation the PPDUs to be analyzed can be defined either by the number of data symbols the number of data bytes or the measurement duration GONFigure BURSEPVT AVERaLQe 2 1 enit Rua te Reg EAE abore cnc ac E PN RR SR ERR ZR 274 GONFigure BURSEPVIRPONWNO
219. P Switch Setup A single analyzer and the Rohde amp Schwarz OSP Switch Platform with at least one fitted R amp S amp OSP B101 option is required to measure the DUT Tx Antennas Note For sequential MIMO measurements the DUT has to transmit identical PPDUs over time The signal field for example has to be identical for all PPDUs For details see chapter 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement on page 76 This setup requires the analyzer and the OSP switch platform to be connected via LAN A connection diagram is shown to assist you in connecting the specified number of DUT Tx antennas with the analyzer via the Rohde amp Schwarz OSP switch platform IUE E Signal Capture Trigger Source Trigger In Out MIMO Capture DUT MIMO Config 3 Tx Antennas 5 MIMO Antenna Signal Capture Setup Simultaneous o Sequential using OSP Switch Box Sequential Manual OSP Switch Box Setup OSP IP Address OSP Switch Bank Configuration 3 TX Antenna DUT Connecting 3 RF antenna s via an OSP Switch Box to the Analyzer Fig 5 1 Connection instructions for sequential MIMO using an OSP switch User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 134 R amp S FSW K91 Configuration Te The diagram shows an R amp S amp OSP B101 option fitted in of the three module slots at the rear of the OSP switch platform The DUT Tx antennas the OSP switching box and the analyzer have to be connected as indicated in the diagram
220. PPDU format HT GF IEEE 802 11 n MVHT Only PPDUs with format VHT are analyzed IEEE 802 11 ac DVHT All PPDUs are assumed to have the PPDU format VHT IEEE 802 11 ac FMMM Only PPDUs with specified format are analyzed see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 IEEE 802 11 b g DSSS FMMD All PPDUS are assumed to have the specified PPDU format see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 IEEE 802 11 b g DSSS RST FBURst SENS DEM FORM BAN BTYP AUTO TYPE FBUR Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Manual operation See PPDU Format to measure on page 142 See PSDU Modulation to use on page 143 See PPDU Format to measure PSDU Modulation to use on page 149 SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONtent AUTO State This command determines whether the PPDUs to be analyzed are determined auto matically or by the user Parameters State ON The signal field i e the PLCP header field of the first recog nized PPDU is analyzed to determine the details of the PPDU All PPDUS identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed OFF Only PPDUs that match the user defined PPDU type and modu lation are considered in results analysis see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 Manual operation See PPDU Analysis Mode on page 142 SENSe
221. PRESET key How to Export and Import I Q Data 2 Press the MODE key and select the R amp S FSW WLAN application or any other application that supports data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name oN o a B Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension ig tar Importing 1 data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the Open icon in the toolbar Select the Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension oco Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser xzy xml gt file D ay xml D Xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment
222. Phase Tracking on page 140 Furthermore the timing drift in FFT is given by phase 2gx 1 Nx xkxl Timing drift 4 3 with amp the relative clock deviation of the reference oscillator Normally a symbol wise timing jitter is negligible and thus not modeled in Timing drift However there may be situations where the timing drift has to be taken into account This is illustrated by an example In accordance to 6 the allowed clock deviation of the DUT is up to max 20 ppm Furthermore a long packet with 400 symbols is assumed The result of FFT and Timing drift is that the phase drift of the highest sub carrier k 26 in the last symbol nof symbols is 93 degrees Even in the noise free case this would lead to symbol errors The example shows that it is actually necessary to estimate and compensate the clock deviation which is accomplished in the next block Referring to the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p measurement standard 6 the timing drift phase nin is not part of the requirements Therefore the time tracking is not activated as the default setting of the R amp S FSW WLAN application see Timing Error Tracking on page 140 The time tracking option should rather be seen as a powerful analyzing option In addition the tracking of the gain g in FFT is supported for each symbol in relation to the reference gain g 1 at the time instant of the long symbol LS At this time the coarse channel transfer fun
223. Power vs Time measurement results Parameters Mode EDGE Displays rising and falling edges only FALL Displays falling edge only FULL Displays the full PPDU RISE Displays the rising edge only Example CONF BURS PVT SEL FULL Interprets the measurement results as full PPDU Selecting a Measurement Manual operation See PvT Full PPDU on page 40 See PvT Rising Edge on page 41 See PvT Falling Edge on page 42 CONFigure BURSt QUAD QCARrier IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type in window 2 to be Quadrature Error vs Carrier Results are only displayed after a measurement is execu ted e g using the INTTiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Quad Error vs Carrier on page 43 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FFT IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be FFT Spectrum Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See FFT Spectrum on page 32 CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness SELect lt MeasType gt This remote control command configures result display type of window 2 to be either Spectrum Flatness or Group Delay Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Parameters lt MeasType gt FLATness GRDelay Example
224. PowerDelta gt lt Limit Check gt lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt lt No gt range number lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt start and stop frequency of the range RBW resolution bandwidth lt PeakFreq gt frequency of the peak in a range lt PowerAbs gt absolute power of the peak in dBm lt PowerRel gt power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc lt PowerDelta gt distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check lt LimitCheck gt state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt reserved 0 0 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values e g for SEM or Spuri ous Emissions measurements Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamp gt lt NumSamples gt Returns all the trace data in the capture buffer The result values are scaled Volts The command returns a comma separated list of the measured voltage values in floating point format Comma Separated Values CSV The number of values returned
225. R amp S9FSW K91 WLAN Measurements User Manual 22 Constellation mna g p Carrier 250 4 SEVM vs Carrier Symb 1 57 Symb Symb 570 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000 85 The following firmware options are described R amp S FSW K91 WLAN 802 1a 1313 1500 02 R amp S FSW K91ac WLAN 802 11ac 1313 4209 02 R amp S FSW K91n WLAN 802 11n 1313 1516 02 R amp S FSW K91p WLAN 802 11p 1321 5646 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K91 Contents Contents ME ooi c 5 1 1 About this Manual
226. RA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated S
227. RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Starting a Measurement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt BURSt IMMediate This command forces the measurement results to be recalculated according to the current settings Manual operation See Calc Results on page 136 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate page 306 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suf
228. Rate Record Length and Usable Bandwidth 363 e R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options 364 e R amp S FSW with options B28 or 028 Bandwidth 365 A 1 1 A 1 2 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 Bandwidth Extension 365 R amp S FSW with option B80 or 080 Bandwidth Extension 365 R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 Bandwidth Extension 366 e Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option pU m 366 e Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option c0 367 Bandwidth Extension Options Max usable Required B option Required U option s Q BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz B40 U28 U40 or B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B80 U160 320 MHz B320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 500 MHz B500 See data sheet Relationship Between Sample Rate and Usable Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the followin
229. Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 299 Auto Mode Determines which algorithm is used to determine whether the x axis or y axis requires automatic rescaling Hysteresis If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measurement exceed a specific value range hysteresis interval the axis is rescaled The hysteresis interval is defined as a percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis An upper hys teresis interval is defined for the maximum value a lower hysteresis interval is defined for the minimum value See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower Memory If the minimum or maximum values of the current measurement exceed the minimum or maximum of the lt x gt previous results respectively the axis is rescaled The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement The number lt x gt of results in the memory to be considered is configu rable see Memory Depth Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MODE on page 301 Auto Fix Range This command defines the use of fixed value limits None Both the upper and lower limits are determined by automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis Lower The lower limit is fixed defined by the Minimum Maximum settings while the upper limit is deter
230. Resh INI Tiatesns SEQUuencer ABORLE rnnt Meenas acessories 306 INI Tiatesnz SEQuencer IMMedi le 221 perii rri RE EE nds 306 INITiatesms SEQuencerMOPBE rint rte tipi ner etse eS eR UR x 307 INITiatesn SEQuencerREFResh ALL rot rit aa teen 308 INITiate n EIMMediate rer xti a terae INPUEAT TSUN AU ON INPut ATTenuation AUTO rere coste Eee acd 211 O OQ ROT 211 212 INPut DIG GDEVIGG ai rore rx Eee re or decere aay SERERE AREAN EEE 228 ly IgndslledsidierueleltiiuE 230 INPut DIG RANGSL UPBOeLt usse contis erre e aet che evans eu ente mer ever eae ever t d n ne 230 INPut DIG RANGeEUPP r AUTO er XN ceca 229 UNIT isein rasanira ene wear ra ye Ee pen ERR Een Rer ERE CE cons cod 230 INPUUDIQ SRAM E 230 INPut DIO SRATeAD TO ctt tierra
231. S only Return values Range ALL PSDU ALL Peak Vector Error results are calculated over the complete PPDU PSDU Peak Vector Error results are calculated over the PSDU only Usage Query only Manual operation See Peak Vector Error Meas Range on page 161 SENSe BURSt COUNt Value If the statistic count is enabled see SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe on page 276 the specified number of PPDUs is taken into consideration for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of PPDUS detected in the current capture buffer If disabled all detected PPDUS in the current capture buffer are considered Parameters Value RST 1 Example SENS BURS COUN STAT ON SENS BURS COUN 10 Manual operation See PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe lt State gt If the statistic count is enabled the specified number of PPDUs is taken into considera tion for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of PPDUs detected in the cur rent capture buffer If disabled all detected PPDUs in the current capture buffer are considered Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS BURS COUN STAT ON SENS BURS COUN 10 Manual operation See PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 SENSe BURSt SELect Value If single PPDU analysis is
232. SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital I Q data input and output INPUt DIO ODEV CE 228 IN PutbIO XWRANGeEEUPPBetr AUTO EI A E pe en E a 229 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIING ereina aiana iaaa aiaa 230 INPUE DIORANG UPP ON M EEISS 230 UNIT isrener a rione eese 230 INPUEDIQ CRATE ES 230 INPUt DIO RS RAMS WTO maidin aa aA Ma 231 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected
233. Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end lt lt lt Retrieving Results CALC LIM FAIL Queries the result of the limit check Result 0 passed TRAC DATA LIST Retrieves the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement Result 1 000000000 1 275000000E 007 8 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 108782336E 009 8 057177734E 001 7 882799530E 001 2 982799530E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 2 000000000 8 500000000E 006 7 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 109000064 009 8 158547211E 001 7 984169006E 001 3 084169006E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 3 000000000 7 500000000E 006 3 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 113987200E 009 4 202708435E 001 4 028330231E 001 5 270565033 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN application Table 10 19 Trace results for SEM measurement Ra Start freq Stop freq RBW Hz Freq peak Abs peak Rel peak Delta to Limit ng Hz Hz power Hz power power margin check e dBm dB result No 1 1 0000000 1 2750000 8 5000000 1 0000000 2 1087823 8 0571777 7 8827995 2 98279 0 0 0 00 00 007 00 006 00 006 36 009 34 001 30 001 9530 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 2 2 00
234. St PREamble IMMediate This remote control command configures the measurement type to be Frequency Error vs Preamble or Phase Error vs Preamble Which of the two is determined by CONFigure BURSt PREamble SELect Manual operation See Freq Error vs Preamble on page 34 See Phase Error vs Preamble on page 38 Selecting a Measurement CONFigure BURSt PREamble SELect lt gt This remote control command specifies whether frequency or phase results are dis played when the measurement type is set to Error Vs Preamble CONFigure BURSt PREamble IMMediate page 204 Parameters lt ErrType gt FREQuency Displays frequency error results for the preamble of the mea sured PPDUs only PHASe Displays phase error results for the preamble of the measured PPDUs only Example CONF BURS PRE SEL PHAS Manual operation See Freq Error vs Preamble on page 34 See Phase Error vs Preamble on page 38 CONFigure BURSt PTRacking IMMediate This remote control command configures the measurement type to be Phase Tracking vs Symbol Manual operation See Phase Tracking on page 38 CONFigure BURSt PVT IMMediate This remote control command configures the measurement type to be Power vs Time Manual operation See PvT Full PPDU on page 40 See PvT Rising Edge on page 41 See PvT Falling Edge on page 42 CONFigure BURSt PVT SELect Mode This remote command determines how to interpret the
235. SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided only for compatibility to remote control programs from WLAN applications on previous signal analyzers For new remote control pro grams use the specified alternative commands Commands for Compatibility CONF BURS lt ResultType gt IMM commands used in former R amp S Signal and Spectrum Analyzers to change the result display are still supported for compatibility reasons however they have been replaced by the LAY ADD WIND commands in the R amp S FSW see chapter 10 7 Configuring the Result Display on page 288 Note that the CONF BURS lt ResultType gt IMM commands change the screen layout to display the Ma
236. Summary For details see chapter 5 4 4 CCDF on page 173 Ref Level 0 50 dBm 2 AnBW 40 MHz Att 488 Meas Time 12 5 ms CF 100 0 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 5 1 0 1 Crest 0 01 66 dB lean 1 7 22 dBm 3 34 dBm 10 56 dB Fig 3 30 CCDF measurement results Remote command CONFigure BURSt STATistics CCDF IMMediate on page 209 Querying results CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 344 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 326 Evaluation Methods for Frequency Sweep Measurements The evaluation methods for frequency sweep measurements in the R amp S FSW WLAN application are identical to those in the R amp S FSW base unit Spectrum application 56 MU RE 56 ups alo etic cpg cian 56 Markor Feak USt a 57 TA User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 55 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be con
237. T gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Input Source Radio Frequency Mixer Settings Basic Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start m RF Stop Handover Freq RF Overrange Preset Band Mixer Settings Range Harmonic Type Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CENMNEDINEE 25575573 CONMEEENNNN FRE EET 102 p 102 MIXGE a E oe t Ond rtr E or 102 Mixer Settings Harmonics 4 0 0 0000000 102 d 1 AR T H 102 Mili o MT 103 L Harmonic Dee esuacscie sort tettist tii etitm folie utet aa tita 103 Bie i di RENE m 103 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 102 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe page 214 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 102 For details on available frequency ranges see table 10 4
238. Te lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 99 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 100 Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for I Q Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 100 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 should be selected if the 50 O input impedance i
239. U to take part in measurement analysis Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt NumDataBytes gt RST 1 Default unit bytes Manual operation See Min Max Payload Length on page 160 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal lt State gt For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS signals only If enabled only PPDUs with a specific duration are considered for measurement analysis If disabled only PPDUs whose duration is within a specified range are considered The duration is specified by the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN command A duration range is defined as a minimum and maximum duration the PPDU may have see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MAX and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MIN Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Equal PPDU Length on page 158 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation MAX Duration For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS signals only Ifthe SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the maximum number of symbols allowed for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal command is set to true then this command has no effect Parameters Duration RST 5464 Default unit us Manual operation See Min Max Payload Length on page 160
240. VT SELect CONFigure BURSEPVT IMMediate trn ern e rp iere rene nre CONFigure BURSCtQUAD QCARrier IMMediate tnnt thin CGONFigure BURStSPEGCtrum ACPREIMMediate aon rano uertit oer na no pen mener ront GONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FF T IMMediate rrr rn te nennt een GONFigure BURStSPECtr m FEATness CSEL 6ct ir d heri GONFigure BURSCtSPECtrum FLATNESS SELEG suorasanainen ti eb PR n pr E Ee SEE PX CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness IMMediate ws GONFigure BURStSPECtrum MASK IMMediate eh ritenere CONFigure BURSEtSTATistics BSTReam IMMediate CONFigure BURSt STATistics CCDF IMMediate CONFigure BURSt STATistics SFleld IMMediate GONFigure POWer AU GONFigure POWer AUTO SWEep TIME rcr nne neret tinere erre GONFigure POWerEXPecled IE concorrente tegere tuo cep aee SEE EET ng HEX XH CONFigure S TANGdald rrt rro ERE ren de et en E en lt gt
241. W WLAN application initially performs a coarse burst search on the input signal in which increa ses in the power vs time trace are detected Further time consuming processing is then only performed where bursts are assumed This improves the measurement speed However for signals in which the PPDU power levels differ significantly this option should be disabled as otherwise some PPDUs may not be detected Improving Channel Estimation and EVM Accuracy The channels in the WLAN signal are estimated based on the expected input signal description and the information provided by the PPDUs themselves The more accu rate the channel estimation the more accurate the EVM based on these channels can be calculated Increasing the basis for channel estimation The more information that can be used to estimate the channels the more accurate the results For measurements that need not be performed strictly according to the WLAN 802 11 standard set the Channel Estimation Range to Payload see nel Estimation Range on page 139 The channel estimation is performed in the preamble and the payload The EVM results can be calculated more accurately R amp S9FSW K91 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Accounting for phase drift in the EVM According to the WLAN 802 11 standards the common phase drift must be estimated and compensated from the pilots Thus these deviations are not included in the EVM To include the phase dri
242. Wer on page 237 R amp S FSW K91 Configuration Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Set tings Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA Master not for the applications Remote command CONFigure POWer AUTO on page 237 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level
243. With a quadrature offset the phase angle deviates from the ideal 90 degrees the amplitudes of both components are of the same size In the vector dia gram the quadrature offset causes the coordinate system to shift A positive quadrature offset means a phase angle greater than 90 degrees WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Fig 3 4 Positive quadrature offset A negative quadrature offset means a phase angle less than 90 degrees Fig 3 5 Negative quadrature offset 3 1 1 4 Skew If transmission of the data on the path is delayed compared to the path or vice versa the data becomes skewed The I Q skew results are currently not measured directly but can be compensated for together with Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Offset see Mismatch Compensa tion on page 140 3 1 1 5 I Q Mismatch mismatch is a comprehensive term for Gain Imbalance Quadrature Offset and 1 0 Skew Compensation for mismatch is useful for example if the device under test is known to be affected by these impairments but the EVM without these effects is of interest Note however that measurements strictly according to IEEE 802 11 2012 IEEE 802 11ac 2013 WLAN standard may not use compensation 3 1 1 6 3 1 1 7 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance RF Carrier Suppression IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Standard definition The RF carrier suppression
244. able to configure the evaluation range for standards IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Standard A a cna Statistics PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDU s to Analyze Time Domain Source of Payload Length Equal PPDU Length Min Payload Length us bytes Max Payload Length 66000 us bytes PVT Peak Vector Error IEEE Meas Range Fig 5 7 Evaluation range settings for IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to 160 Edual PRD W 160 Min Max Payload engl erret aa re daria Peer 160 PVT Average 22 160 PYT Reference 161 Peak Vector Error Meas ann d o ER eee 161 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze If the statistic count is enabled the specified number of PPDUs is taken into considera tion for the statistical evaluation Sweeps are performed continuously until the required number of PPDUs are available The number of captured and required PPDUs as well as the number of PPDUs detected in the current sweep are indicated as Analyzed PPDUS in the channel bar See Channel bar information on page 11 If disabled all valid PPDUs in the current capture buffer are considered Note that in this case
245. added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active
246. age Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 100 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 98 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 99 INPut FILTer HPASs STA
247. ains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if 2 the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter Table 10 18 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register No Meaning 0 PPDU not found This bit is set if an IQ measurement is performed and no PPDUs are detected 1 This bit is not used 2 No PPDUs of REQuired type This bit is set if an IQ measurement is performed and no PPDUS of the specified type are detec ted 3 GATE length too small This bit is set if gating is used in a measurement and the gate length is not set sufficiently large enough 4 PPDU count too small This bit is set if a PVT measurement is performed with gating active and there is not at least 1 PPDU within the gate lines 5 Auto level OVERIoad This bit is set if
248. alled and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA mode external mixers are not supported nc cuum 214 Mixer Se UINGS ii 216 e Conversion Loss Table Sbttirigs ice rtt dta tes 221 e Programming Example Working with an External 225 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer ISENSeJMIXer STATS a iiiter e Pese que eu nU E Rx EN taeda 214 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH iiit rhetoricae rut iach cade eben nep reor pp 215 SENSe MIXer BIAS LLOW eccentric 215 SENSE MPA THEO IM 215 Em 215 SENSe MIXer THResh ld coli 216 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 101 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high Second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer
249. allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 10 11 3 5 10 11 3 6 10 12 Commands for Compatibility Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt
250. aluation method are described in chapter 10 9 4 4 Bitstream on page 335 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt STATistics BSTReam IMMediate on page 207 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 4 Bitstream on page 335 Constellation This result display shows the in phase and quadrature phase results for all payload symbols and all carriers for the analyzed PPDUS of the current capture buffer The Tracking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied The inphase results 1 are displayed on the x axis the quadrature phase Q results on the y axis E User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 27 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Stream 1 4 Stream 1 Stream2 Stream3 Stream 4 2 2 Stream 2 2 3 Stream 3 2 4 Stream 4 Fig 3 10 Constellation result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in on page 337 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see on page 289 or on page 203 Querying results See on page 337 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 28 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Constellation vs Carrier This result display shows the in phase and quadrature phase results for all payload symbols and all carriers for the analyzed PPDUS of the current capture buffer The Tra
251. alyzer named 1 Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt Example Usage String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Event Activating WLAN Measurements INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 10 3 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse
252. an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results aaa a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON sms Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Configuring the mixer band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH
253. an be expor ted for further analysis in external applications See chapter 7 1 Import Export Functions on page 175 Frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the mea surement setup For more information on the use and effects of these settings see chapter 4 8 Pre paring the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters on page 84 e Input Source Sete 97 e cet ette recti etra 114 FREQUENCY RR ERR ERE SERRE REA DR 116 e Amplitude 117 5 3 3 1 Input Source Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze e The Digital 1 input source is currently not available in the R amp S FSW WLAN applica tion Radio Frequency 98 e JjExternal Mixer Setlfigs ce rear te al 100 e Digital Input SettiflgsS 110 e Analog Baseband Input 111 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequenc
254. an usually be executed directly for test purposes chapter A Annex Reference on page 361 Reference material List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts Printed Getting Started manual Online Help system on the instrument Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the 2 icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operati
255. analyzers simultaneously via its TRIGGER OUTPUT e Manual mode a trigger is generated by the Trigger Unit and triggers all analyzers simultaneously No connection to the DUT is required Each of the Trigger Unit s TRIG OUT connectors is connected to one of the analyz er s TRIGGER INPUT connectors A trigger signal is generated when you press release the TRIG MANUAL button on the Trigger unit Note In manual mode you must turn on the NOISE SOURCE output of the master analyzer manually see the manual of the analyzer A Trigger Unit is activated in the Trigger Source Settings The required connections between the analyzers the trigger unit and the DUT are visualized in the dialog box The NOISE SOURCE output of the master analyzer must be connected to the Trigger Unit s NOISE SOURCE input for all operating modes to supply the power for the Trig ger Unit For more detailed information on the R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit and the required con nections see the R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit Manual 4 10 WLAN Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The R amp S FSW WLAN application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA oper ating mode o In MSRA operating mode the IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards are not suppor ted SSE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 88 R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extra
256. and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Usage Query only FETCh BURSt EVM DATA AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM DATA MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM DATA MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM for the data carrier in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Usage Query only FETCh BURSt EVM DIRect AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM DIRect MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM DIRect MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM in dB for the IEEE 802 11b standard This result is the value after filtering For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt EVM PILot AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM PILot MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM PILot MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM in dB for the pilot car rier For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Usage Query only Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt EVM IEEE AVERage FETCh BURSt EVM IEEE MAXimum FETCh BURSt EVM IEE
257. and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 9 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 186 How to Determine the OBW SEM ACLR or CCDF for WLAN Signals a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File Define a name and storage location and select OK 9 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 Optimizing the Measurement Results Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement e Optimizing the Measurement 188 e Error Messages and Warnings ssesssssssseeeneeeeneen nennen nnns 189 Optimizing the Measurement Results If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement IMPFOVING Performall6g eet entume Misa ie Rx 188 e Improving Channel Estimation and EVM 188 Improving Performance Performing a coarse burst search For signals with low duty cycle rates enable the Power Interval Search for synchro nization see Power Interval Search on page 137 In this case the R amp S FS
258. aneously by multiple analyzers see Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics on page 132 the data streams to be analyzed must be synchronized in time The R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit can ensure that all analyzers start capturing data at the same time Compared to using the master s trigger out function using the Trigger Unit pro vides a more accurate synchronisation of the slaves However it requires the addi tional hardware The Trigger Unit is connected to the DUT and all involved analyzers Then the Trigger Unit can be used in the following operating modes e External mode If the DUT has a trigger output the trigger signal from the DUT triggers all analyzers simultaneously The DUT s TRIGGER OUTPUT is connected to the Trigger Unit s TRIG INPUT connector Each of the Trigger Unit s TRIG OUT connectors is connected to one of the analyzer s TRIGGER INPUT connectors Free Run mode This mode is used if no trigger signal is available The master analyzer sends a trigger impulse to the Trigger Unit to start the measurement as Soon as all slave analyzers are ready to measure The NOISE SOURCE output of the master analyzer is connected to the Trigger Unit s NOISE SOURCE input Each of the Trigger Unit s TRIG OUT connectors is connected to one of the analyzer s TRIGGER INPUT connectors When the master analyzer sends a signal to the Trigger Unit via its NOISE SOURCE output the Trig ger Unit triggers all
259. annel bandwidth of 20MHz DB40 All PPDUs are analyzed within a channel bandwidth of 40MHz IEEE 802 11 n ac only DB80 All PPDUs are analyzed within a channel bandwidth of 80MHz IEEE 802 11 n ac only DB160 All PPDUs are analyzed within a channel bandwidth of 160MHz Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance IEEE 802 11 n ac only RST FBURst Example SENS BAND CHAN AUTO TYPE 20 Manual operation See Channel Bandwidth to measure CBW on page 143 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze Format Specifies which PSDUs are to be analyzed depending on their modulation Only PSDUS using the selected modulation are considered in result analysis Note to analyze all PPDUs that are identical to the first detected PPDU corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU use the command SENS DEMO FORM BANA BTYP AUTO TYPE FBUR To analyze all PPDUs regardless of their format and modulation corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU use the command SENS DEMO FORM BANA BTYP AUTO TYPE ALL See SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 Parameters lt Format gt RST QAM64 Example SENS DEMO FORM BAN BPSK6 Manual operation See PPDU Format to measure on page 142 See PSDU Modulation to use on page 143 See PSDU Modulation on page 144 See PPDU Format to measure PSDU Modulation to
260. annels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 92 Starting a Measurement INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer comma
261. antenna Signal Capture Setup select Sequential Manual 8 To define a particular starting point for the FFT or to improve the measurement speed for signals with a low duty cycle select the Synchronization OFDM Demod button and set the required parameters 9 Select the Tracking Channel Estimation button to define how the data channels are to be estimated and which distortions will be compensated for e g crosstalk between the MIMO antennas at the DUT 10 Select the Demod button and then the Demod tab to provide information on the modulated signal and how the PPDUS detected in the capture buffer are to be demodulated 11 In the Demodulation dialog box select the MIMO tab to define which spatial mapping mode is used that is how the space time streams are mapped to the antennas a If necessary include a time shift for the individual antennas R amp S FSW K91 How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application po ee eee SSE ey b Ifthe signal power is amplified according to the maxtrix entries so that the total transmitted power is not increased the measured powers can be normalised to consider this effect in demodulation 12 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which data in the capture buffer you want to analyze 13 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 14 Exit the SmartGrid mode
262. apter 2 Welcome to the WLAN Application on page 9 Introduction to and getting familiar with the application chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 Details on supported measurements and their result types chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 58 Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement chapter 5 Configuration on page 91 and chapter 6 Analysis on page 174 A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command chapter 7 1 Import Export Functions on page 175 Description of general functions to import and export raw measurement data chapter 8 How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application on page 179 The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods chapter 9 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement on page 188 Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup chapter 10 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements on page 191 Remote commands required to configure and perform WLAN measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and c
263. ard Rather when you select the IEEE 802 11ac or n standard MIMO is automatically available In the default configuration a single transmit antenna and a single receive antenna are assumed which corresponds to the common SISO setup R amp SSFSW K91 Measurement Basics M H P d M Basic technologies Some basic technologies used in MIMO systems are introduced briefly here For more detailed information see the Rohde amp Schwarz Application Note 1 142 Introduc tion to MIMO available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website MIMO systems use transmit diversity or space division multiplexing or both With transmit diversity a bit stream is transmitted simultaneously via two antennas but with different coding in each case This improves the signal to noise ratio and the cell edge capacity For space division multiplexing multiple different data streams are sent simultane ously from the transmit antennas Each receive antenna captures the superposition of all transmit antennas In addition channel effects caused by reflections and scattering etc are added to the received signals The receiver determines the originally sent symbols by multiplying the received symbols with the inverted channel matrix that is the mapping between the streams and the transmit a
264. are assumed to have the specified PPDU format PSDU modulation Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 SENSe DEMod FORMat SIGSymbol on page 273 PPDU Format If analysis is restricted to PPDUs with a particular format see PPDU Format to mea sure PSDU Modulation to use this setting defines which type For details on supported modulation depending on the standard see table 4 1 Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe on page 354 PSDU Modulation If analysis is restricted to PSDU with a particular modulation type this setting defines which type For details on supported modulation depending on the standard see table 4 1 Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 5 3 8 4 Demodulation IEEE 802 11n The following settings are available for demodulation of IEEE 802 11n signals Demodulation 80 0 MHz Standard ALT GI Se Demodulation MIMO PPDUS to Analyze PPDU Analysis Mode for each property to analyze PPDU Format to measure Channel Bandwidth to measure up to CBW40 MHz MCS Index STBC Field Auto same type as first PPDU Extension Spatial Streams sounding Auto same type as first PPDU 5 s Modulation Data Rate Mb s Index Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 800ns GI 400ns GI
265. arrower bandwidth filter and they capture only the power level magnitude which we refer to as RF data of the signal as opposed to the two components provided by data Frequency sweep measurements can tune on a constant frequency Zero span mea surement or sweep a frequency range Frequency sweep measurement User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 51 Frequency Sweep Measurements The signal cannot be demodulated based on the captured RF data However the required power information can be determined much more precisely as more noise is filtered out of the signal The Frequency sweep measurements provided by the R amp S FSW WLAN application are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but are pre config ured according to the requirements of the selected WLAN 802 11 standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA operating mode Frequency sweep measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 3 2 1 The R amp S FSW WLAN application provides the following frequency sweep measure ments Measurement Types and Results for Frequency Sweep Measure ments The R amp S FSW WLAN application provides the following pre configured frequency sweep measurements Channel Power AGUR neni A e a 52 Spectrum Emission Mask ccc tast
266. as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 2 Welcome to the WLAN Application The R amp S FSW WLAN application extends the functionality of the R amp S FSW to enable accurate and reproducible Tx measurements of a WLAN device under test DUT in accordance with the standards specified for the device The following standards are currently supported if the corresponding firmware option is installed IEEE standards 802 11a EEE standards 802 11ac SISO MIMO standards 802 116 IEEE standards 802 119 OFDM EEE standards 802 119 DSSS e standards 802 11 EEE standards 802 11n SISO MIMO EEE standards 802 11p The R amp S FSW WLAN application features Modulation measurements Constellation diagram for demodulated signal Constellation diagram for individual carriers Q offset and imbalance e Modulation error EVM for individual carriers or symbols Amplitude response and group delay distortion spectrum flatness Carrier and symbol frequency errors Further measurements and results Amplitude statistics CCDF and crest factor e FFT also over a selected part of the signal e g preamble Payload bit information
267. ata from magnitude capture buffer for second ms TRACe1 1Q DATA MEMory 201 400 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Select window 4 EVM vs carrier DISP WIND4 SEL Query the current EVM vs carrier trace TRAC DATA TRACE Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the result of the average EVM for all carriers FETC BURS EVM ALL AVER Query the result of the EVM limit check for all carriers CALC LIM BURS ALL RES Return to standard defined limits CALC LIM BURS ALL Query the result of the EVM limit check for all carriers again CALC LIM BURS ALL RES 10 13 2 Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN application fg Exporting Captured I Q Data Store the captured I Q data to a file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW WLAN SEMMeasurement Activate a WLAN measurement channel named SEMMeasurement Configuring the measurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz CONF BURS SPEC MASK Select the spectrum emission mask measurement 4 222252 Performing the Measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100
268. atically when you change the evaluation range Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e the line lies outside the interval The analysis line is displayed in the following result displays Magnitude Capture Power vs Time e EVM vs Symbol User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 89 WLAN Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Mult
269. ating point number with a value between 0 and 1 The syntax of the result is thus N CCDF 0 CCDF 1 10 CCDF 2 10 CCDF N 1 10 10 9 4 6 Constellation This measurement represents the complex constellation points as and Q data See for example IEEE Std 802 11 2012 Fig 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encoding Each and Q point is returned in floating point format Data is returned as a repeating array of interleaved and Q data in groups of selected carriers per OFDM Symbol until all the and Q data for the analyzed OFDM Symbols is exhausted The following carrier selections are possible e All Carriers CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect ALL pairs of and data OFDM Symbol OFDM Symbol 1 114 Q 4 Q1 nst OFDM Symbol 2 11 122 Q22 la usc OFDM Symbol N Qu 2 In so Pilots Only CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect PILOTS pairs of and data per OFDM Symbol in the natural number order OFDM Symbol 1 1 1 4 Q1 Nsp OFDM Symbol 2 12 1 122 Q2 12 Q2 Nsp OFDM Symbol N In 2 Qu2 IN Nsp Qu Single carrier 1 pair of and Q data per OFDM Symbol for the selected carrier CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect k with ke t
270. ation see the R amp S FSW User Manual to perform the WLAN fre quency sweep measurements The R amp S FSW WLAN application automatically sets the parameters to predefined settings as described in chapter 5 4 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 170 The WLAN RF measurements must be activated for a measurement channel in the WLAN application see chapter 10 3 Activating WLAN Measurements on page 197 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements in the WLAN application PENSE os text 286 5 1 T YET E EE REY RR NEZ 288 SENSe POWer SEM Type This command sets the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement type Parameters Type IEEE ETSI User User Settings and limits are configured via a user defined XML file Load the file using MMEMory LOAD SEM STATe on page 354 IEEE Settings and limits are as specified in the IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission For other IEEE standards see the parameter values in the table below After a query IEEE is returned for all IEEE standards ETSI Settings and limits are as specified in the ETSI standard RST IEEE
271. ation then selects the optimal scaling from the selected values For details see Scaling per division on page 167 Parameters Multiple 1 0 2 0 2 5 5 0 If enabled each division on the x axis or y axis displays the selected multiple of 10 RST 1 0 5 0 Example DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 2 0 2 5 Multiples of 2 0 10 or multiples of 2 5 10 are displayed on the x axis or y axis Manual operation See Scaling per division on page 167 Starting a Measurement 10 8 Starting a Measurement When a WLAN measurement channel is activated on the R amp S FSW a WLAN IQ mea surement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance see chapter 3 1 WLAN Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance on page 13 is started immediately However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see chapter 5 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 91 ABORT M M 304 cGALCulatesm BURSITIMMetalg cdi cer aod theol etae teen netz 305 INITiatesns CONTINUOUS sri nai Foe tt xe oye eV E v prae RA EE NE 305 lt gt 306 INITIatesn SEQuesmncerABODE artic tren oue d eaten ex a cu 306 lt gt 5 306 lt gt 5
272. ats are to be included in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different formats of PPDUs are availa ble Thus you can restrict analysis to the supported formats Note The PPDU format determines the available channel bandwidths For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The format of the first valid PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same format Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their format Meas only M Only PPDUs with the specified format are analyzed Demod all as D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified PPDU format Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze on page 268 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Channel Bandwidth to measure CBW Defines the channel bandwidth of the PPDUs taking part in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different PPDU formats and channel bandwidths are supported For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths dep
273. automatically chosen to minimize the intersym bol interference Guard Interval Cntr Guard Interval Center The FFT start offset is placed to the center of the guard interval Peak The peak of the fine timing metric is used to determine the FFT start offset Remote command SENSe DEMod FFT OFFSet on page 256 Tracking and Channel Estimation Access Overview gt Tracking Channel Estimation The channel estimation settings determine which channels are assumed in the input signal Tracking settings allow for compensation of some transmission effects in the signal see Tracking the phase drift timing jitter and gain on page 62 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Channel Estimation Channel Estimation Range Tracking Tracking for the signal to be measured Phase Timing IQ Mismatch Compensation Off Pilots for Tracking According to Standard t MIMO Compensate Crosstalk Channel Estimation 139 Fhaso 140 Timing Error TRACKING correctior rte eee incer i ec eh ce cerae 140 Level Error Gain Tracking eerte tot ct c a 140 Mismatch 140 Pilotsfor ipe 140 Compensate Crosstalk MIMO 0 1000
274. be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 105 See Bias on page 108 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 106 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRectio
275. be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command For details on the trigger source see Trigger Source Settings on page 125 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 7 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For details on the trigger settings see Trigger Source Settings on page 125 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is
276. be tested and the emis sions and their distance to the limit are identified Note that the WLAN standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions The Result Summary contains a peak list with the values for the largest spectral emis sions including their frequency and power The WLAN application performs the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum application with the following settings Frequency Sweep Measurements Table 5 4 Predefined settings for WLAN SEM measurements Setting Default value Number of ranges 3 Frequency Span 12 75 MHz Fast SEM OFF Sweep time 140 us RBW 30 kHz Power reference type Channel Power Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz Number of power classes 1 You must select the SEM file with the pre defined settings required by the standard manually using the Standard Files softkey in the main SEMask menu The subdir ectory displayed in the SEM standard file selection dialog box depends on the standard you selected previously for the WLAN Modulation Accuracy Flatness measurement see Standard on page 96 5 4 3 For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level of
277. between Tx and Rx symbol index 1 nof_Symbols nof_symbols number of symbols of payload Hk channel transfer function of subcarrier k k channel index k 31 32 modulation dependent normalization factor relative clock error of reference oscillator Nk subcarrier of symbol e Block Diagram for Multicarrier 0 042 58 e Literature on the IEEE 802 11a 2 65 4 1 1 Block Diagram for Multicarrier Measurements A diagram of the significant blocks when using the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p standard in the R amp S FSW WLAN application is shown in figure 4 1 First the RF signal is downconverted to the IF frequency fic The resulting IF signal r t is shown on the left hand side of the figure After bandpass filtering the signal is sam pled by an analog to digital converter ADC at a sample rate of f This digital Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p sequence is resampled Thus the sample rate of the downsampled sequence is the Nyquist rate of f 20 MHz Up to this point the digital part is implemented in an ASIC 20MHz t PE Ese o gm S 8 pepe P FIR LH f 152m pilots data data 05 user defined compensation meme f estimation of gain frequency 5 oz 2
278. cking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS The x axis represents the carriers The magnitude of the in phase and quadrature part is shown on the y axis both are displayed as separate traces l trace 1 Q trace 2 4Constellation vs Carrier Carrier 250 50 1 Carrier Stream 1 4 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 2 2 Stream 2 Carrier 127 Carrier 122 25 C Carrier 122 Carrier 122 Fig 3 11 Constellation vs carrier result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in on page 338 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH see on page 289 or on page 203 Querying results see on page 338 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 29 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays EVM vs Carrier This result display shows all EVM values recorded on a per subcarrier basis over the number of analyzed PPDUs as defined by the Evaluation Range gt Statistics The Tracking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied see on page 138 The Minhold Average and Maxhold traces are displayed This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS EVM vs Carrier Mine 2 Avge3 Max Carrier 250 50 1 Carrier Carrier 250 Stream 1 4 St
279. command returns the average maximum or minimum I Q skew in picoseconds For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MCPower AVERage FETCh BURSt MCPower MAXimum FETCh BURSt MCPower MINimum This command returns the MIMO cross power average maximum or minimum value in dB for the IEEE 802 11n MIMO standard For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modula tion Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Parameters lt Result gt Stream 1 result Stream n result FETCh BURSt PAYLoad AVERage FETCh BURSt PAYLoad MINimum FETCh BURSt PAYLoad MAXimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum of the Payload Power per PPDU in dBm All analyzed PPDUs up to the statistic length take part in the statisti cal evaluation Usage Query only FETCh BURSt PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt PEAK MINimum FETCh BURSt PEAK MAXimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum of the Peak Power per PPDU in dBm All analyzed PPDUs up to the statistic length take part in the statisti cal evaluation Usage Query only FETCh BURSt PREamble AVERage FETCh BURSt PREamble MINimum FETCh BURSt PREamble MAXimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum of the Preamble Power per PPDU in dBm All analyzed PPDUS up to the statistic length take part in the statisti cal evaluation Usage Que
280. considered when the trigger level is analyzed For details on the trigger source see Trigger Source Settings on page 125 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 128 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance TRIGger SEQuence LEVel POWer AUTO lt State gt By default the optimum trigger level for power triggers is automatically measured and determined at the start of each sweep for Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance measurements This function is only considered for TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP and TRIG SEQ SOUR RFP See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 In order to define the trigger level manually switch this function off and define the level using TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 246 or TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 247 Parameters for setting and query State OFF Switches the auto level detection function off ON Switches the auto level detection function on RST ON Manual operation See Trigger Level Mode on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considere
281. ct of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the R amp S FSW WLAN application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal cap ture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the WLAN I Q measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW WLAN application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channel carrier or PPDU to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edi ted directly in the R amp S FSW WLAN application but is changed autom
282. ction If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow 1 42 200M STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separate
283. ction FIC9 is calculated This makes sense since the sequence is compensated by the coarse channel trans fer function before estimating the symbols Consequently a potential change of the gain at the symbol caused for example by the increase of the DUT amplifier temperature may lead to symbol errors especially for a large symbol alphabet M of the MQAM transmission In this case the estimation and the subsequent compensation of the gain are useful Referring to the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p measurement standard 6 the compen sation of the gain g is not part of the requirements Therefore the gain tracking is not activated as the default setting of the R amp S FSW WLAN application see Level Error Gain Tracking on page 140 Determining the error parameters log likelihood function How can the parameters above be calculated In this application the optimum maxi mum likelihood algorithm is used In the first estimation step the symbol independent parameters fest and are estimated The symbol dependent parameters be User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 62 Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p neglected in this step i e the parameters are set to g 1 and dy 0 Referring to FFT the log likelihood function L must be calculated as a function of the trial parame ters and 2 The tilde generally describes a trial parameter
284. ctor must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Baseband Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW 1 Analyzer and Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Digital Trigger Source lt Trigger Source Settings For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and 1 are available as Digital trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins Table 5 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins
285. d The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz For details on the trigger source see Trigger Source Settings on page 125 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 129 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source Settings on page 125 Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Paramet
286. d by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle 10 2 6 1 Introduction Parameters may have different forms of values N rneris cie ea dese Pe eb 195 s 196 e Character io 196 Character SIUS 196 196 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1 9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query nu
287. d queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt 10 9 3 Retrieving Results Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 55 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the WLAN IQ measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured The traces for frequency sweep measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect on page 207 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving trace results OVE EDY ttt tette entente tenente ttes te tts te teat teat sons 4 327 SENSE JBURSEUSELGgOl ite deca va 328 SENSe BURSISEEeGES T
288. device Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 111 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on pag
289. dicates a carrier offset with fixed amplitude This results in a constant shift of the axes The offset is normalized by the mean symbol power and displayed in dB a de de 42 do 02 06 oa rs drehen Fig 3 1 I Q offset in a vector diagram Gain Imbalance An ideal modulator amplifies the and Q signal path by exactly the same degree The imbalance corresponds to the difference in amplification of the and Q channel and therefore to the difference in amplitude of the signal components In the vector dia gram the length of the vector changes relative to the length of the Q vector The result is displayed in dB and 96 where 1 dB offset corresponds to roughly 12 96 difference between the and gain according to the following equation Imbalance dB 20log Gaing Gain Positive values mean that the vector is amplified more than the vector by the corre sponding percentage For example using the figures mentioned above 0 98 20 log10 1 12 1 3 1 1 3 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Fig 3 2 Positive gain imbalance Negative values mean that the vector is amplified more than the Q vector by the cor responding percentage For example using the figures mentioned above 0 98 20 log10 1 1 12 Fig 3 3 Negative gain imbalance Quadrature Offset An ideal modulator sets the phase angle between the and Q path mixer to exactly 90 degrees
290. e metet 345 Area Multiple mode remote 346 Area reriote e eta con 345 Multiple mode remote 345 346 345 Single mode remolte dtr 345
291. e Parameters lt SignalPath gt Example Manual operation RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 For details see Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture on page 135 RST RX1 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure RX2 INIT IMM Starts capturing data from the receive antenna number 2 See Single Cont on page 136 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure BUFFer lt SignalPath gt Specifies the signal path to be captured in MIMO sequential manual measurements and immediately starts capturing data Parameters lt SignalPath gt Example RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 For details see Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture on page 135 RST RX1 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure BUFFer RX2 Starts capturing data from the receive antenna number 2 CONFigure WLAN MIMO CAPTure TYPE Method Specifies the method used to analyze MIMO signals Parameters Method Manual operation SIMultaneous OSP MANual SIMultaneous Simultaneous normal MIMO operation OSP Sequential using open switch platform MANual Sequential using manual operation RST SIM See MIMO Antenna Signal Capture Setup on page 132 See Manual Sequential MIMO Data Capture on page 135 CONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP ADDRess Address Specifies the TCP IP address of the switch unit to be used for automated sequential MIMO measurements The supported unit is Rohde amp Schwarz OSP 1505 3009 03 with module option 1505 5101 02 Con
292. e 111 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 111 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 111 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 111 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 111 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Samp
293. e S OU RGe 1 Baa baa e 248 TRIGSer SEQuencel uu eio er on Ernte E Eee 250 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 244 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 05 RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the hold
294. e To perform a single sweep measurement press the RUN SINGLE hardkey e To perform a continuous sweep measurement press the RUN CONT hardkey In MSRA mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key Measurement results are updated once the measurement has completed To select the application data for MSRA measurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Mas ter in the R amp S FSW WLAN application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in another application you would now like to analyze the same data in the R amp S FSW WLAN application 1 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for WLAN measure ments 2 Select the Signal Capture button 3 Define the application data range as the Capture Time 4 Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula capture offset starting point for application starting point in capture buf fer 5 The analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected chan nel carrier or PPDU to analyze defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the channel carrier PPDU is analyzed wit
295. e WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 102 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 102 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables ISENSeTCORRection CYL BAND tabe ree at 221 SENSe CORRection CVUL Saut e ANAE Naa 222 tato RR AER ERE R AR RR RR 222 ISENSeTGORRecUOI CYL CLEN 222 SENSe CORRection CVL ICOMMAnt 223 SENSe J CORRecton C VESIDA TA ierit due theo a AEE bad eR te 223 SENSe CORRection CVE HARMORIG 12 ic carretera RE Rr enda 224 5 Een net tacente e vie 224 SENSe CORRection CVE PORTS iaceo iriure fec resta cd
296. e adjacent and alternate channels are displayed in the Result Sum mary 5 4 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to WLAN specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio Table 5 3 Predefined settings for WLAN ACLR Channel Power measurements Setting Default value ACLR Standard same as defined in WLAN signal descrip tion see Standard on page 96 Number of adjacent channels 3 Reference channel Max power Tx channel Channel bandwidth 20 MHz For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW Sweep time Span Number of adjacent channels Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus for the frequency sweep measurements are identical to the Spectrum application Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the WLAN 802 11 specifications The limits depend on the selected power class Thus the performance of the DUT can
297. e ede a deant 214 e Configuring Digital Input and 227 e Configuring Input the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 231 e QGonfiguring 2t eter terre pner eee uen rex eer ua nts n 234 10 5 2 1 RF Input INPUtATTenuatior PRO rection 2 211 INPURGONNGQ1OO E 211 WING OU PUGS 212 aa a 212 INPut FIETerHPASSESTATe cecesssdectediovadezcaentiacacatersieracceisvsbhaeueursanavdeerasanerctaasddaaecivies 212 INPUEFIET ERVICES TAT iTA 213 213 T aE 213 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see chapter 4 7 1 RF Input Protection on page 82 Us
298. e etude cee 189 Phase drift 140 259 PIOUS c 140 259 PPDU levels 140 258 259 PPDU timing nette ette 140 260 Quadrature phase angle 1 18 19 Quadrature offset Status bits or SYMBOMUMING retro Estimates Signal processing IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 60 Estimating Channels IEEE 802 11 g OFDM j p 64 Evaluation methods Frequency sweep measurement 55 Remote 289 Trace data 2 332 WEAN 22 Evaluation range eerte ptis cece 274 Result displays x Iur qe 174 EVM Calculating IEEE 802 11 g OFDM j p Calculating WLAN secant ete tee tette t Data CaiTlers comer erp e ree nre eoe Data carriers limit check result remote E nr ets E IEEE 802 115b 9 DSSS hts Limit check result remote Limits remote Optimizing Pilot cattiers cetera Pilot carriers limit check result remote es JNEC ote ner ntes E eee ote eee vs carrier result display vs carrier trace data vs chip result display vs symbol result display Exporting nitentes
299. e following sec tions MultiView 22 Spectrum WLAN Sampling Rate Fs 320 0 MHz Standard IEEE 802 11ac Capt Time No of Samples 5ms 1 PPDU MCS Index GI Meas Sctup 1 Tx X 1 Rx No of Data Symbols SGL Analyzed PPDUs 1 Magnitude Capture 2 6 Spectrum Flatness 1 Avg Result Summary Global Bursts Min 7 0 0s 4 5 0 ms Carrier 250 50 L amier Carrier 250 2 Constellation 1 4 EVM vs Symbol V Mir Avg Mex 5 EVM vs Carrier Symb 570 Carrier 250 50 1 Carrier User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 10 R amp S FSW K91 Welcome to the WLAN Application u Ee SS ey 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 3 Diagram area with marker information 4 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 5 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the WLAN application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the WLAN application Label Description Sa
300. e signal field for each analyzed PPDU The signal field bit sequence is converted to an equivalent sequence of hexadecimal digits for each analyzed PPDU in transmit order Spectrum Flatness The spectrum flatness evaluation returns absolute power values per carrier in dBm Two trace types are provided for this evaluation Table 10 17 Query parameter and results for Spectrum Flatness TRACE1 An average spectrum flatness value for each of the 53 or 57 117 within the IEEE 802 11 n standard carriers TRACE2 All spectrum flatness values per channel Supported data formats FORMat DATA ASCii REAL Importing and Exporting Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the WLAN application can not only be measured by the WLAN application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated 1 0 data from the WLAN application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEMory LOADING STAT Cc iren eue eric bet gu reed es eodd tv bed dade ud 342 gt 8 ertt dei rented eee esee 343 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores data from a file The file extension is iqw Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the
301. easurement CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate IEEE 802 11b and 9 DSSS CONFigure BURSt EVM ECHip IMMediate Both of these commands configure the measurement type to be EVM vs Chip for IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards For compatibility reasons the CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate command is also supported for the IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards However for new remote control programs use the LAYout commands see chapter 10 7 2 Working with Windows in the Dis play on page 289 Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Manual operation See EVM vs Chip on page 31 CONFigure BURSt EVM ESYMbol IMMediate This remote control command configures the measurement type to be EVM vs Symbol For IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standards this command selects the EVM vs Chip result display Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See EVM vs Chip on page 31 See EVM vs Symbol on page 31 CONFigure BURSt GAIN GCARrier IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be Gain Imbalance vs Carrier Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Gain Imbalance vs Carrier on page 34 CONFigure BUR
302. eb browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt 2 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt g xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32
303. ected measurement channel e General Window 5 1 netiis ath ka dan tni 288 e Working with Windows in the 0 em 289 e Selecting Items to Display in Result Summary esee 296 e Configuring the Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay Result Displays 298 e Configuring the AM AM Result 298 10 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 200 DISPlawEORMB c rire oru 288 DISPIay WINDOW sM SIZE 5 ipud iit pene tte 289 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Configuring the Result Display Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 294 Parameters Size
304. ed see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 108 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 109 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modula
305. ed for all PPDUs Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex MODE on page 271 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance MCS Index Defines the MCS index of the PPDUs taking part in the analysis manually This field is enabled for MCS index to use Meas only the specified MCS or Demod all with specified MCS Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex on page 271 Nsts to use Defines the the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on their Nsts Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display NSTS column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using the Nsts identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only the specified Nsts M Only PPDUs with the Nsts specified for the Nsts on page 147 set ting are analyzed Demod all with specified Nsts D The Nsts on page 147 setting is used for all PPDUs Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex MODE on page 272 Nsts Defines the Nsts of the PPDUS taking part in the analysis This field is enabled for Nsts to use Meas only the specified Nsts or Demod all with specified Nsts Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat NSTSindex on page 272 STBC Field Defines the PPDUs taking part in the a
306. ed to show the results for the the new evaluation range The selected PPDU is marked by a blue bar in PPDU based results see on page 36 Note AM AM AM EVM and AM PM results are not updated when single PPDU analy sis is selected User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 157 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance In MSRA mode single PPDU analysis is not available Remote command SENSe BURSt SELect STATe on page 276 SENSe BURSt SELect on page 276 PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze If the statistic count is enabled the specified number of PPDUS is taken into considera tion for the statistical evaluation Sweeps are performed continuously until the required number of PPDUs are available The number of captured and required PPDUs as well as the number of PPDUS detected in the current sweep are indicated as Analyzed PPDUS in the channel bar See Channel bar information on page 11 If disabled all valid PPDUS in the current capture buffer are considered Note that in this case the number of PPDUs contributing to the current results may vary extremely Remote command SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe on page 276 SENSe BURSt COUNt on page 275 Source of Payload Length Defines which signal source is used to determine the payload length of a PPDU Take from Signal Field IEEE 802 11 A J P Uses the length defined by the signal field L S
307. ee SYSTem SEQuencer on page 308 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Starting a Measurement Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 92 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 308 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those ch
308. een analyzer and digital I Q data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S is established 10 Digital I Q Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital 1 Q data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 Digital Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 STATus QUEStiOnable DIG CONDIEO 2 cor petere ornatu apetece ka coausacceajutiecasanaes 349 STATUs QUEStionable DIQ ENABle 222 etiara rotate Ran 349 STATUS QUEStiofdbIe DIG 12 2 350 5 lt nnne nnn nne 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENIt esses 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt Cha
309. eep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 285 SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 169 Frequency Sweep Measurements 5 4 Frequency Sweep Measurements 5 4 1 When you activate a measurement channel in WLAN mode an IQ measurement of the input signal is started automatically see chapter 3 1 WLAN Measurement Modu lation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance on page 13 However some parameters specified in the WLAN 802 11 standard require a better signal to noise level or a smaller bandwidth filter than the default measurement on 1 0 data provides and must be determined in separate measurements based on RF data see chapter 3 2 Fre quency Sweep Measurements on page 51 In these measurements demodulation is not performed Selecting the measurement type WLAN measurements require a special operating mode on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key To select a frequency sweep measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The R a
310. el bandwidths larger than 10 MHz require a bandwidth extension option on the R amp S FSW see chapter A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 361 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Bandwidth gt FBURst ALL 5 10 MB20 MB40 MB80 160 DB5 DB10 DB20 DB40 DB80 DB160 FBURSt The channel bandwidth of the first valid PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same channel bandwidth corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of the channel bandwidth corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MB5 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 5MHz are analyzed IEEE 802 11 a p only MB10 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 10MHz are analyzed IEEE 802 11 a p only MB20 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 20MHz are analyzed MB40 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 40MHz are analyzed IEEE 802 11 n ac only MB80 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 80MHz are analyzed IEEE 802 11 ac only MB160 Only PPDUs within a channel bandwidth of 160 2 are ana lyzed IEEE 802 11 ac only DB5 All PPDUs are analyzed within a channel bandwidth of 5MHz IEEE 802 11 a p only DB10 All PPDUs are analyzed within a channel bandwidth of 10MHz IEEE 802 11 a p only DB20 All PPDUs are analyzed within a ch
311. emod all with specified MCS D The MCS Index setting is used for all PPDUs Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex MODE on page 271 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance MCS Index Defines the MCS index of the PPDUs taking part in the analysis manually This field is enabled for MCS index to use Meas only the specified MCS or Demod all with specified MCS Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat MCSindex on page 271 STBC Field Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis according to the Space Time Block Cod ing STBC field content Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using a STBC field content identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only if STBC field 1 1 Stream M1 IEEE 802 11 Only PPDUs with the specified STBC field content are analyzed Meas only if STBC field 2 2 Stream M2 IEEE 802 11N Only PPDUS with the specified STBC field content are analyzed Demod all as STBC field 1 D1 IEEE 802 11N All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field content Demod all as STBC field 2 D2 IEEE 802 11N All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field cont
312. emote Deleting remote Duplicating 197 Querying remote 199 Renaming remote 200 Replacing remote 198 Selecting 200 REMOS sass 242 Measurements Frequency SWEEP ciere entrer t ne lo 51 zt S 52 pesos te adii pee xac Ede 52 Selecting 91 95 Selecting remote tenere dn 201 Setup displayed 11 Starting remote etes cae oor 304 13 Messages Signal Field oit trinis Antenna assignment Calculating results ss Capture o sent cto tmr remains iurat Capture method Capture settings Demodulation settings DUT configuration How to perform measurement Joined RX Sync and Tracking Manual data capture Manual sequential capture Normalizing power OSP P address ee PPDU synchronization Reference frequency coupling Sequential capture using OSP Simultaneous capture settings Slave analyzers Spatial mapping mode User defined spatial mapping Minimum
313. ency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 5 3 3 2 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 M 114 ID 115 L Output Typa 115 Sr o 115 RE 115 Im 116 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 4 7 2 Input from Noise Sources on page 82 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 234 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on t
314. ending on the standard see table 4 1 Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The channel bandwidth of the first valid PPDU is detected and subse quent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same channel band width Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their channel bandwidth Meas only signal M Only PPDUs with the specified channel bandwidth are analyzed Demod all signal D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified channel bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE on page 266 MCS Index to use Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on their Modulation and Cod ing Scheme MCS index Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using the MCS index identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only the specified MCS M Only PPDUs with the MCS index specified for the MCS Index setting are analyzed Demod all with specified MCS D The MCS Index setting is us
315. ent Meas only if STBC 1 Nsts 2Nss M1 IEEE 802 11AC Only PPDUs with the specified STBC field content are analyzed Demod all as STBC 1 2Nss D1 IEEE 802 11AC All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field content Remote command CONFigure WLAN STBC AUTO TYPE on page 265 Extension Spatial Streams sounding Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis according to the Ness field content Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display NESS column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same All PPDUs using a Ness value identical to the first recognized PPDU type as first are analyzed PPDU A1st Auto individu All PPDUs are analyzed ally for each PPDU AI WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Meas only if Only PPDUs with the specified Ness value are analyzed Ness lt gt Demodallas All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified Ness value Ness lt x gt Remote command CONFigure WLAN EXTension AUTO TYPE on page 261 Table info overview Depending on the selected channel bandwidth MCS index or NSS STBC the rele vant information from the modulation and coding scheme MCS as defined in the WLAN 802 11 standard is displayed here This information is for reference only for example so you can determine the required data rate Gua
316. ent channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application These settings include the input source the type of data to be processed I Q or RF data frequency and level settings measurement functions etc If you want to perform the same measurement but with dif ferent center frequencies for instance or process the same input data with different measurement functions there are two ways to do so Change the settings in the measurement channel for each measurement scenario In this case the results of each measurement are updated each time you change the settings and you cannot compare them or analyze them together without stor ing them on an external medium e Activate a new measurement channel for the same application In the latter case the two measurement scenarios with their different settings are displayed simultaneously in separate tabs and you can switch between the tabs to compare the results For example you can activate one WLAN measurement channel to perform a WLAN modulation accuracy measurement and a second channel to perform an Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function SEM measurement using the same WLAN input source Then you can monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed on the R amp S FSW at any time If
317. ent results for the Transmit ter and Receiver channels and for the bitstream This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 4 Result Summary Detailed Ween TURK 4 1 Tx 1 Mean 4 2 Tx 2 Rx 2 Tx 2 Limit Mean 20 00 Limit 20 00 0 04 0 00 0 01 Limit Limit PE Stream 2 Limit Lir BER Pilo Fig 3 24 Detailed Result Summary result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The Result Summary Detailed contains the following information Note You can configure which results are displayed see chapter 5 3 10 Result Con figuration on page 161 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility Tx channel Tx All offset dB Gain imbalance dB Quadrature offset skew ps PPDU power dBm Crest factor dB Receive channel Rx All PPDU power dBm Crest factor dB MIMO cross power Center frequency error Symbol clock error CPE Bitstream Stream All e Pilot bit error rate e EVM all carriers dB User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 44 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays OU a ees e EVM data carriers dB EVM pilot carriers dB For details on the individual parameters and the summarized values see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH
318. ent with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 305 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 55 See Marker Table on page 56 See Marker Peak List on page 57 R amp S FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements 10 10 2 Zooming into the Display 10 10 2 1 Using the Single Zoom BIS WINDOW 0 gt 345 gt STA TE rtt pant ceto in aan 345 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm MU CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt
319. er YIG STATe on page 213 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW 1 9 Analyzer Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 211 External Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer If installed the optional external mixer can be configured from the R amp S FSW WLAN application Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA mode MIKE SQUINGS 55 ices erede rr dee Rud 100 TR eases dedi 104 e Managing Conversion Loss 105 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss 107 Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings or INPUT OUTPU
320. eraged or restricted to peak values data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e mport Export FHIDCUODS ouc cerise eni ir ehe e d e rate even 175 e Howto Exportand Import VO Bala itr ttt db ig teer eas 176 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar These functions are only available if no measurement is running In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data a A M 176 E Ul NR 176 3 jojo 0 176 L WO Bpo RU 176 Import Provides functions to import data Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an impo
321. ers lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled I Q data For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface TIME Time interval BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface PSEN External power sensor GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the optional Digital Base band Interface is available Defines triggering of the
322. ers of subcarriers Ngp Nsp IEEE 802 11 a p 5 48 4 52 IEEE 802 11 a j p 10 48 4 52 IEEE 802 11 a j p 20 48 4 52 IEEE 802 11n 20 52 4 56 IEEE 802 11n 40 108 6 114 IEEE 802 11ac 20 52 4 56 IEEE 802 11ac 40 108 6 114 IEEE 802 11ac 80 234 8 242 IEEE 802 11ac 160 468 16 484 IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standard DSSS physical layers For the IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS standard the data is returned in PPDU order Each PPDU is represented as a series of bytes For each PPDU the first 9 or 18 bytes represent the PLCP preamble for short and long PPDU types respectively The next 6 bytes represent the PLCP header The remaining bytes represent the PSDU Data is returned in ASCII printable hexadecimal character format TRACE 1 is used for these measurement results CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function The length of the results varies up to a maximum of 201 data points is returned fol lowing a data count value The first value in the return data represents the quantity of probability values that follow Each of the potential 201 data points is returned as a probability value and represents the total number of samples that are equal to or exceed the current mean power level 336 Retrieving Results Probability data is returned up to the power level that contains at least one sample It is highly unlikely that the full 201 data values will ever be returned Each probability value is returned as a flo
323. eshift lt TimeShift gt This remote control command specifies the timeshift for a specific antenna Parameters lt TimeShift gt Time shift in s for specification of user defined CSD cyclic delay diversity for the Spatial Mapping Range 32 ns to 32 ns Manual operation See User Defined Spatial Mapping on page 156 CONFigure WLAN STBC AUTO TYPE lt PPDUType gt This remote control command specifies which PPDUs are analyzed according to STBC streams for IEEE 802 11n ac standards only Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt PPDUType gt FBURst ALL MO M1 M2 DO D1 D2 FBURst The STBC of the first PPDU is detected and subsequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same STBC corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All recognized PPDUs are analyzed according to their individual STBC corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU 0 1 2 Measure only if STBC field 0 1 2 For details see STBC Field on page 147 DO D1 D2 Demod all as STBC field 0 1 2 For details see STBC Field on page 147 Example CONF WLAN STBC AUTO TYPE MO Manual operation See STBC Field on page 147 SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE lt Bandwidth gt This remote control command specifies the bandwidth in which the PPDUs are ana lyzed This command is only available for standards IEEE 802 11a ac n Note that chann
324. ete te Ye De Re a SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt lt SENSe MIXer LOSS AIGH SENSe IMIXer EOSS TABDe HIGLI uai eer E E cu Dep Ee v 5 1 085 SENSe IMIXer EOSSEEONW ttp eni ne dei tpe E A a nes SENSe IMIXer PORTS iiic rem ot eric nie pe ce Ex Fore Fee EYE ERR SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe SENSe IMIXer SIGN l 1 c terrre rte D ava ed fe Ro C CH SENSe MiIXer TFI ReSliold koh Fe RE RA ERE ENSE ROS SENSE DS STATE SENSe MSRA GAP T te OEFSOl ctr rtr t tee n dete oe E tp tr ee EE c pp c n SEM nione nter agent c ee POW tesis Heb Il SENSe SWEep HIME cte ie c ve ng DE LI GET SENSe see also SENSE commands essen eene enne enne nne 260 CALCulate EIMIEBURSEEVM ALEEEAVERadQe it ia cta ettet th tertiae tenent ipea 281
325. evel are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 5 3 12 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured Continuous Sweep RUN 169 single Sweep RUN SINGLE rete trn rtt i ee tein cit 169 Conine Single SWOOP xac ta f o D Re e o Rn 169 Retesh MSRA ODIY m eaaa iiaia aa 169 R amp S FSW K91 Configuration Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 305 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN
326. evice The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 230 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 231 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 230 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 230 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 229 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 230 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 228 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it WLAN IQ Meas
327. ffset frequency offset and phase offset but not with the estimates of the gain imbalance and Q offset With these values the gain imbalance of the I branch and the gain imbalance of the Q branch are estimated in a non linear estimation in a second step x 81 2 6 v 0 Gain imbalance I branch 4 18 1S 00 0 Gain imbalance Q branch 4 19 Finally the mean error vector magnitude can be calculated with a non data aided cal culation E 272 14 fe 22 REAL o0 T 3 05 441 0 0 Verr v v Mean error vector magnitude 4 20 The symbol error vector magnitude is the error signal magnitude normalized by the root mean square value of the estimate of the measurement signal power R amp S9FSW K91 4 2 3 4 3 er User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 71 Measurement Basics REAL v 6 9 5 IMAG 4 2 BP 68 Symbol error vector magnitude 4 21 Verr v The advantage of this method is that no estimate of the reference signal is needed but the offset and gain imbalance values are not estimated in a joint estimation proce dure Therefore each estimation parameter disturbs the estimation of the other param eter and the accuracy of the estimates is lower than the accuracy of the estimations achieved by transmit antenna baseband filter Tx filter estimation
328. figured CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Offset Power TX1 Ref MHz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm Offset Lower Jpper 50 000 kHz 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 980 MHz 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Tip To navigate within long result summary tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers 4 Marker Table Wnd X value 1 M1 13 25 GHz 600 0 kHz 1 1 1 M1 600 0 kHz 1 2 0 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 56 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 326 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on 344 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines
329. figuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Address gt Manual operation OSP Address on page 135 CONFigure WLAN MIMO OSP MODule ID Specifies the module of the switch unit to be used for automated sequential MIMO measurements The supported unit is Rohde amp Schwarz OSP 1505 3009 03 with mod ule option 1505 5101 02 Parameters ID A11 A12 A13 Manual operation See OSP Switch Bank Configuration on page 135 CONFigure WLAN RSYNc JOINed lt State gt This command configures how PPDU synchronization and tracking is performed for multiple antennas Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON RX antennas are synchronized and tracked together OFF RX antennas are synchronized and tracked separately RST OFF Manual operation See Joined RX Sync and Tracking on page 133 10 5 5 Synchronization and OFDM Demodulation SENSeDEMOGEET IGEESGl iier Irae e uhr orien re Maa 256 SENSeTDEMod TXAR GE icit ott a de geo event ea tete dac vene duc cen sa cadat 257 SENSe DEMod FFT OFFSet Mode This command specifies the start offset of the FFT for OFDM demodulation not for the FFT Spectrum display 10 5 6 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO PEAK AUTO The FFT start offset is automatically chosen
330. fix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 169 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Cont on page 136 See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 169 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 306 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 308 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 92 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated s
331. for all other measurements irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters lt Measurement gt ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W GACLr For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of ACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 MACM For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of CACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return value
332. format of the input signal Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt DataType gt IQ I IQ IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF 1 Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE 0 Manual operation See Q Mode on page 112 CALibration AlQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 110 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing T
333. fset e Sweep time Span The main measurement menus for the frequency sweep measurements are identical to the Spectrum application Occupied Bandwidth Access Overview Select Measurement OBW or MEAS Select Measurement OBW The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Table 5 5 Predefined settings for WLAN 802 11 OBW measurements Setting Default value 96 Power Bandwidth 99 Channel bandwidth 3 84 MHz Frequency Sweep Measurements The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset RBW VBW Sweep time Span 5 4 4 CCDF Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt CCDF or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution funct
334. ft Common phase drift is divided into two parts to calculate the overall frequency deviation of the DUT The reason for the phase jitter dy in Common phase drift may be different The nonlin ear part of the phase jitter may be caused by the phase noise of the DUT oscillator Another reason for nonlinear phase jitter may be the increase of the DUT amplifier temperature at the beginning of the PPDU Note that besides the nonlinear part the phase jitter dy also contains a constant part This constant part is caused by the fre quency deviation f est not yet compensated To understand this keep in mind that the measurement of the phase starts at the first symbol 1 of the payload In contrast the channel frequency response in FFT represents the channel at the long symbol of the preamble Consequently the frequency deviation A frest not yet compensated produces a phase drift between the long symbol and the first symbol of the payload Therefore this phase drift appears as a constant value DC value in R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics Tracking the phase drift timing jitter and gain Referring to the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p measurement standard chapter 17 3 9 7 Transmit modulation accuracy test 6 the common phase drift phase mon must be estimated and compensated from the pilots Therefore this symbol wise phase tracking is activated as the default setting of the R amp S FSW WLAN application see
335. ft disable Phase Tracking see Phase Tracking on page 140 Analyzing time jitter Normally a symbol wise timing jitter is negligible and not required by the IEEE 802 11a measurement standard 6 and thus not considered in channel estimation However there may be situations where the timing drift has to be taken into account However to analyze the time jitter per symbol enable Timing Tracking see Timing Error Tracking on page 140 Compensating for non standard conform pilot sequences In case the pilot generation algorithm of the device under test DUT has a problem the non standard conform pilot sequence might affect the measurement results or the WLAN application might not synchronize at all onto the signal generated by the DUT In this case set the Pilots for Tracking to Detected see Pilots for Tracking on page 140 so that the pilot sequence detected in the signal is used instead of the sequence defined by the standard However if the pilot sequence generated by the DUT is correct it is recommended that you use the According to Standard setting because it generates more accurate mea surement results 9 2 Error Messages and Warnings The following messages are displayed in the status bar in case of errors Results contribute to overall results despite inconsistencies Info Comparison between HT SIG Payload Length and Estimated Payload Length not performed due to insufficient SNR The R amp S FSW
336. g baseband input is activated the trigger source is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Power lt Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the Usable I Q Bandwidth which depends on the sample rate of the captured data see Input Sample Rate on page 122 chapter A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 361 Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Power Sensor Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRI
337. g rule applies Usable bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz The figure 1 1 shows the maximum usable I Q bandwidths depending on the output sample rates Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input A 1 3 Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable I Q bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Regarding the record length the following rule applies Record length Measurement time sample rate Maximum record length for RF input The maximum record length that is the maximum number of samples that can be cap tured depends on the sample rate Table 1 1 Maximum record length without I Q bandwidth extension options B320 U320 B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples precisely 461373440 440 1024 1024 samples 200 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples upsampling MSRA master 200 MHz to 600 MHz The figure 1 1 shows the maximum usable I Q bandwidths depending on the output sample rates Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input Hz a 160 MHz Activated option B160 0160 PEt LLLE LL LS ECL ILL AE 90 LA LLL o H v option B160 U160 IIT
338. global evaluations The remaining correct PPDUs are highlighted green in the Magnitude Capture buffer and Signal Field result displays and analyzed according to the current user settings Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters Example The evaluation range is configured to take the Source of Payload Length from the signal field If the power period detected for a PPDU deviates from the PPDU length coded in the signal field a warning is assigned to this PPDU The decoded signal field length is used to analyze the PPDU The decoded and measured PPDU length together with the apropriate information is shown in the Signal Field result display 4 6 Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters The demodulation settings define which PPDUs are to be analyzed thus they define a logical filter They can either be defined using specific values or according to the first measured PPDU Which of the WLAN demodulation parameter values are supported depends on the selected digital standard some are also interdependant Table 4 1 Supported modulation formats PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on standard Standard Modulation formats PPDU formats Channel bandwidths IEEE 802 11a BPSK 6 Mbps amp 9 Mbps Non HT 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz g OFDM jP QPSK 12 Mbps amp Short PPDU 18 Mbps Long PPDU 16QAM 24 Mbps amp 36 Mbps 64QAM 48 Mbps amp 54 Mbps IEEE 802 11ac 16QAM VHT 20 MHz 40 MHz 80
339. gnal Field display for IEEE 802 11n The signal field information is provided as a decoded bit sequence and where appro priate also in human readable form beneath the bit sequence for each PPDU The currently applied demodulation settings as defined by the user see chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation on page 141 are indicated beneath the table header for reference Since the demodulation settings define which PPDUs are to be analyzed this logical filter may be the reason if the Signal Field display is not as expected Table 3 5 Demodulation parameters and results for Signal Field result display IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p Parameter Description Format PPDU format used for measurement Not part of the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM p signal field displayed for convenience see PPDU Format to measure on page 142 CBW Channel bandwidth to measure Not part of the signal field displayed for conven ience Rate Mbit s Symbol rate per second R Reserved bit M User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 47 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameter Description Length Sym Human readable length of payload in OFDM symbols P Parity bit Signal Tail Signal tail preset to 0 Table 3 6 Demodulation parameters and results for Signal Field result display IEEE 802 11ac Parameter Description Format PPDU format used for measurement Not pa
340. gnitude Capture buffer in window 1 at the top of the screen and the selected result type in window 2 below that MMEMOM EOAD SEM S ee gere ved ea a pr 354 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe eese 0 354 TRIGger SEQuence MODE 355 MMEMory LOAD SEM STATe lt 1 gt Filename This command loads a spectrum emission mask setup from an xml file Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SENS ESP PRES command for new remote control programs See the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands for SEM measurements chap ter Parameters 1 Filename string Path and name of the xm1 file that contains the SEM setup information Example MMEM LOAD SEM STAT 1 Nsem StdNWLANN802 11 802 11a 10MHz 5GHz band XML SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe lt PPDUType gt This remote control command specifies the type of PPDU to be analyzed Only PPDUs of the specified type take part in measurement analysis Commands for Compatibility Parameters lt PPDUType gt LONG Only long PLCP PPDUs are analyzed Available for IEEE 802 11b g SHORT Only short PLCP PPDUs are analyzed Available for IEEE 802 11b g MM20 IEEE 802 11n Mixed Mode 20 MHz sample rate Note that this setting is mainta
341. gs and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto Manual Ad e Level 1986100 Serial Number 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Digital VQ Input State eere 110 Input Sample d En ce e ER EUER 111 psg 111 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale 111 Connected 111 Digital Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 213 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected d
342. gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 10 11 Status Registers The WLAN application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW depending on the measurement type However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the following sections User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 346 Status Registers For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual o RST does not influence the status registers e The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register 347 STATus QUEStonable DIQ Register 2 oreet eter 348 e Querying the Status 351 10 11 1 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register cont
343. han nels Description Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the data binary file For multi channels the samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 372 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the 1 data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt xyz a valid Windows file name Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData PreviewData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer
344. he front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For simultaneous MIMO measurements see Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup on page 132 if you set the master s TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector to device triggered output the master R amp S FSW sends its trigger event signal to any connected slaves See also chapter 4 9 5 Trigger Synchronization Using the Master s Trigger Output on page 87 Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 251 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 250 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Tr
345. he trace is determined by calculating a polynomial regression model of a specified degree see chapter 5 3 10 3 AM AM Configuration on page 163 for the scattered measurement vs reference signal data The resulting regression polynomial is indica ted in the window title of the result display Note The measured signal and reference signal are complex signals This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 4 AM AM Polynomial Fitting X 0 00 0 9 10 0 dBm Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH AMAM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Or CONFigure BURSt AM AM IMMediate on page 202 Polynomial degree CONFigure BURSt AM AM POLYnomial on page 298 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 1 AM AM on page 335 E User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 23 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays AM PM This result display shows the measured and the reference signal in the time domain For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal The y axis value represents the angle difference of the measured signal minus the ref erence signal This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS 1 AM PM Clrw 10 0 dBm Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH AMPM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt AM PM IMMediate on page 203 Querying res
346. heme MCS as defined in the WLAN 802 11 standard is displayed here This information is for reference only for example so you can determine the required data rate Guard Interval Length Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on the guard interval length Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using the guard interval length identical to the first recog nized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only Short MS Only PPDUS with short guard interval length are analyzed Meas only Long ML Only PPDUs with long guard interval length are analyzed Demod all as short DS All PPDUs are demodulated assuming short guard interval length Demod all as long DL All PPDUs are demodulated assuming long guard interval length Remote command CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO on page 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO TYPE on page 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe SELect on page 263 5 3 8 3 Demodulation IEEE 802 11b g DSSS The following settings are available for demodulation of IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS sig nals WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance PPDUs to Analyze Meas only the specified PPDU Format
347. hin the appli cation data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the cap ture buffer move through the channels carriers PPDUs in the evaluation range or correct the application data range 6 Ifthe Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep menu to update the result displays for the changed application data How to Analyze WLAN Signals MIMO Measurement Setup 8 2 How to Analyze WLAN Signals in a MIMO Measure ment Setup MIMO measurements are only available for IEEE 802 11ac n standards They can be performed automatically or manually see chapter 4 3 4 Capturing Data from MIMO Antennas on page 75 To perform a manual sequential measurement 1 Press the MODE key 2 Select the WLAN item WLAN The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the WLAN application 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a WLAN measurement 4 Selectthe Signal Description button to select the digital standard EEE 802 11ac or IEEE 802 11n 5 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 6 Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 7 Select the MIMO Capture tab to define how the data from the MIMO antennas is to be captured a For the DUT MIMO Config select the number of TX antennas data will be transmitted from b Under MIMO
348. how the binary data is saved in the data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format and values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter 2 2 Data Binary File on page 372 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary data itself has no unit To get an sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed Data File Format iq tar Element NumberOfC
349. i eet te eite por ee e Te eaae dude dy de 53 Occupied Bandwidlli 54 Ger 55 Channel Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR performs an adjacent channel power also known as adjacent channel leakage ratio measurement according to WLAN 802 11 specifications The R amp S FSW measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed in the Result Sum mary R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Ref Level 7 36 RBW 10 kHz 17dB SWT 100 ms VBW 300 kHz Mode Aut CF 850 0 MHz Span 4 19 MHz 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth F 229 MHz 1001 pts 419 0 2 CDMA 2000 Offset Power 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm 79 59 dB 85 04 dB Upper 80 34 dB 83 85 dB For details see chapter 5 4 1 Channel Power ACLR Measurements on page 170 Remote command CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum ACPR IMMediate page 208 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 324 Spectrum Emission Mask Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt SEM or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt SEM The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement determines the power of the WLAN 802 11 signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values
350. ia ae Qs STBC pping Hers uae mI internal cross talk Channel Flatness Group Delay Physical Channel Hpny F Channel Flatness Effective Channel Has Q i EVMss EVMsrs Offset Burst Power Conventional EVM Conventional EVM Gain Imbalance Crest Factor of Data Carrier of Pilot Carrier Quadrature Offset Data Constellation Pilot Constellation BER Pilot Streams Fig 4 6 Results at individual processing stages Receive antenna results The R amp S FSW WLAN application can determine receive antenna results directly from the captured data at the receive antenna namely PPDU Power Crest factor For all other results the R amp S FSW WLAN application has to revert the processing steps to determine the signal characteristics at those stages Transmit antenna results based on the physical channel If the R amp S FSW WLAN application can determine the physical channel see chap ter 4 3 3 Physical vs Effective Channels on page 74 it can evaluate the following results Channel Flatness based on the physical channel Group Delay based on the physical channel Offset Quadrature Offset e Gain Imbalance R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics Space time stream results based on the effective channel If the application knows the effective channel see chapter 4 3 3 Physical vs Effective Channels on page 74 it can evalua
351. ibutes different PPDU attributes a ie cis same PPDU attributes di PPDU attribut different PPDU contents gt Le PPDU simu ci A T en 4 3 5 Fig 4 5 Basic principle of Sequential MIMO Measurement with 2 receive antennas Note that additionally the data contents of the sent PPDU payloads must also be the same for each Tx antenna but this is not checked Thus useless results are returned if different data was sent To provide identical PPDU content for each Tx antenna in the measurement you can use the same pseudo random bit sequence PRBS with the same PRBS seed initial bit sequence for example when generating the useful data for the PPDU Calculating Results When you analyze a WLAN signal in a MIMO setup the R amp S FSW acts as the receiv ing device Since most measurement results have to be calculated at a particular stage in the processing chain the R amp S FSW WLAN application has to do the same decoding that the receive antenna does The following diagram takes a closer look at the processing chain and the results at its individual stages Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n Spatial Space Time Transmit DUT Receive Stream Stream Antenna Antennas Signals Signals Signals I d Space Time 5 a R y Block Code M
352. ication normalizes the EVM values Thus an EVM of 100 indicates that the error power on the or Q channels equals the mean power on the I or Q channels respectively The peak vector error is the maximum EVM over all payload symbols and all active carriers for one PPDU If more than one PPDU is analyzed several analyzed PPDUs in the capture buffer or due to the PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze setting the Min Mean Max columns show the minimum mean or maximum Peak EVM of all analyzed PPDUs The IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS standards allow a peak vector error of less than 3596 In contrary to the specification the R amp S FSW WLAN application does not limit the measurement to 1000 chips length but searches the maximum over the whole PPDU WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for WLAN IQ Measurements The captured data from the WLAN signal be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement or sweep Which results are dis played depends on the selected evaluation The selected evaluation method not only affects the result display in a window but also the results of the trace data query in remote control see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 329 All evaluations available for the selected WLAN measurement are displayed in Smart Grid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following E Select the Smar
353. igger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 251 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 251 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 252 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Send Trigger Output Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 252 5 3 3 3 Frequency Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Frequency or FREQ gt Frequency Config Frequency Center Freque Stepsize Freque Offset Value 0 0 Hz i e E 116 Canter Frequency 9Stepslza 1 cies de e ede in eux Ern que en 116 Frequency Offset
354. ignal IEEE 802 11 AC Determines the length of the L signal HT Signal IEEE 802 11 N Determines the length of the HT signal Estimate from signal Uses an estimated length Remote command CONFigure WLAN PAYLoad LENGth SRC on page 274 Equal PPDU Length If enabled only PPDUs with the specified Min Max Payload Length are considered for measurement analysis If disabled a maximum and minimum Min Max Payload Length can be defined and all PPDUs whose length is within this range are considered Remote command IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j n p SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal on page 279 IEEE 802 11 b g DSSS SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DURation EQUal on page 278 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze DBYTes EQUal on page 277 Min Max No of Data Symbols If the Equal PPDU Length setting is enabled the number of data symbols defines the exact length a PPDU must have to be considered for analysis 5 3 9 2 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance If the Equal PPDU Length setting is disabled you can define the minimum and maxi mum number of data symbols a PPDU must contain to be considered in measurement analysis Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN on page 280 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX on page 279 Evaluation Range Settings for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS The following settings are avail
355. ined for compatibility reasons only Use the specified commands for new remote control pro grams see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 and SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE on page 266 For new programs use SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE MMIX SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE MB20 GFM20 IEEE 802 11n Green Field Mode 20 MHz sample rate Note that this setting is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the specified commands for new remote control pro grams see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE on page 269 and SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE on page 266 For new programs use SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze BTYPe AUTO TYPE MGRF SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE MB20 Manual operation See PPDU Format on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence MODE Source Defines the trigger source Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence SOURce page 248 commands for new remote control pro grams This command configures how triggering is to be performed Parameters Source IMMediate EXTernal VIDeo RFPower IFPower TV AF AM FM PM AMRelative LXI TIME SLEFt SRIGht SMPX SMONo SSTereo SRDS SPILot BBPower MASK PSENsor TDTRigger IQPower EXT2 EXT3 Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN applicatio
356. ing Tracking IEEE 802 11 g OFDM p Level error tracking nr Limits Defining remote cisci iaaa rne 280 2v a 281 282 EVM pilot carriers result 321 result eene tk etate 320 Fregeurcy error result ec eee ee 321 Frequency EMOT coco coude Beeren dee emet beau de 282 A L 282 I Q offset resulE centena 321 Symbol clock ee 283 Symbol clock error result 322 Lines MENU 93 Literature IEEE 802 11a 9g OFDM D net 65 LO Level External Mixer remote control 215 Level External Mixer LO feedthrough Log likelihood function IEEE 802 11a 9 OFDM jj D ne ret 62 logical tee trente tens 81 Long symbol LS IEEE 802 11a 9 OFDM Ded tee 60 M Magnitude Capture Result display Trace data iiit me tod secs Marker Functions 25 93 Marker table Evaluation method eee tette 56 Markers Configuration Querying position remote Table evaluation method Maximizing Windows 289 MGS Index caetero meri ter ee Displayed ite e bd aae Displayed information E io dM Measurement channel Creating r
357. ing time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 129 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range dB to 50 RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 129 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 128 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must
358. ings are available e Result Summary Conftgu ation certe teo eee recette 161 e Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay 162 AMAM Cohfloutation errat e har nap Pe Hr Rasa creo 163 5 3 10 1 Result Summary Configuration You can configure which results are displayed in Result Summary displays see Result Summary Detailed on page 44 and Result Summary Global on page 45 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility on the screen 5 3 10 2 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance IEEE 802 1 i Result Summary Global Items Pilot Bit Error EVM All Carriers EVM Data Carriers EVM Pilot Carriers Center Frequency Error Symbol Clock Error 27575781 3 Result Summary Global Fig 5 8 Result Summary Global configuration for IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p standards Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe ITEM on page 296 Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay Configuration For MIMO measurements Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay results can be based on either the effective channels or the physical channels While the physical channels cannot always be determined the effective channel can always be estimated from the known training fields Thus for some PPDUs or mea surement scenarios only the results based on the mapping of the space time
359. ion rrt trt 10 Statistic count 158 160 276 deere noes eee etal doe 275 Statistics PPDUS erra e 17 Programming example 956 Stat s Decet ae Pietas 12 Error messages 189 Status registers COMMONS eR 347 QUERYING coit eic rrt cen ertet STAT QUES BOW fiet tet sehe STATus QUEStionable DIQ ET STATus QUEStionable SYNC 347 WEAN 347 5 PPDUS dte hts PPDUS remote Suffixes COMMON Mor 191 Remote commands imss 193 Swap I Q REMOTE 242 16 123 Sweep ADOMING 169 Configuration softkey us TIME remote c e e eee eta 242 Symbol clock orc Pr error limit remote Error limit check result remote Symbols Count remote eed 309 Bic 63 Long IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 60 Short IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 2 60 Syrichronizatior en 137 Remote control 52 nite terrere 256 T Time trigger 25 40 riae 128 MONKEY T 128 Timing EN Detection IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p Deviations oos ite dieit deinde id FIG
360. ion The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in zero span and the distribution of the signal ampli tudes is evaluated The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power The Result Summary dis plays the number of included samples the mean and peak power and the crest factor The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the follow ing settings Table 5 6 Predefined settings for WLAN 802 11 CCDF measurements Setting Default value CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 Detector Sample For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset Analysis bandwidth Number of samples 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace and markers etc are currently not available for the standard WLAN measurements Only one Clear Write trace and one marker are available for these measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea suremen
361. iple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 5 Configuration 5 1 The default WLAN I Q measurement captures the I Q data from the WLAN signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy spectrum flatness center frequency tolerance and symbol clock tolerance in just one measurement see chapter 3 1 WLAN I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flat ness and Tolerance on page 13 Other parameters specified in the WLAN 802 11 standard must be determined in sepa rate measurements see chapter 5 4 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 170 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here Selecting the measurement type gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement e Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer 91 Display ConfiguretiQhi uceecrr cene tractet ce tft re D tdi 93 e WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 93 e Frequency Sweep 170 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurem
362. is played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information mm User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 11 Understanding the Display Information 2 Magnitude Capture 4 5 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information the WLAN application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop values for the displayed x axis range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Click on a displayed warning or error message to obtain more details see also WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 3 Measurements and Result Displays The R amp S FSW WLAN application provides several different measurements in order to determine the parameters described by the WLAN 802 11 specifications For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 91 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 13 Frequency Sweep Measurements entree netter ada
363. is is rescaled The hysteresis interval is defined as a percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis An upper hysteresis interval is defined for the maximum value a lower hysteresis interval is defined for the minimum value MEMory If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measure ment exceed the minimum and or maximum of the lt x gt previous results the axis is rescaled The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measure ment The number of results in the memory to be considered is config urable see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh RST HYSTeresis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO MODE MEM Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe DIVisions lt NoDivisions gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions lt NoDivisions gt Defines the number of divisions to be used for the x axis or y axis in the specified win dow Separate division settings can be configured for individual result displays Parameters lt NoDivisions gt Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL DIV 10 Manual operation See Number of Divisions on page 167 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe MAXimum Max DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCA
364. is 2 the number of complex samples the first half being the values the second half the Q values Parameters lt OffsetSamp gt Offset of the values to be read related to the start of the capture buffer Range 0 to lt NumSamples gt 1 lt NumSamples gt Number of measurement values to be read Range 1 to lt NumSamples gt lt OffsetSa gt Retrieving Results 10 9 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here No trace data is available for the following evaluation methods o Magnitude Capture Result Summary Global Detailed As opposed to the R amp S FSW base unit the window suffix n is not considered in the R amp S FSW WLAN application Use the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect to select the window before you query trace results For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for WLAN IQ Measurements on page 22 The following table provides an overview of the main characteristics of the WLAN OFDM symbol structure in the frequency domain for various standards The description of the TRACe results refers to these values to simplify the description Retrieving Results 96 22 uonenbe 2
365. istics settings see PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 All 57 carriers are shown including the unused carrier 0 This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Carrier 250 50 1 Carrier Carrier 250 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 35 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Group Delay Stream LERI 1 4 Stream 1 Rx 1 4 Stream 2 1 4 Stream 3 Rx 1 4 Stream 4 1 4 St gt 3 1 Stream 1 Rx 1 3 2 Stream 1 Rx 2 3 3 Stream 1 Rx 3 3 4 Stream L Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr Cz Carrier 25 Carr Carrer 25 Cart Carrier 25 Carr 3 5 Stream 2 Rx 1 3 6 Stream 2 Rx 2 3 7 Stream 2 Rx 3 3 8 Stream 2 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr Carner 25 Carr f Carrier 25 Carr arrier Carrier 25 Carr 3 9 Stream 3 Rx 1 3 10 Stream 3 Rx 2 3 11 Stream 3 Rx 3 3 12 Stream 3 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr C Carner 25 Carr C Carrier 25 Carr 3 13 Stream 4 Rx 1 3 14 Stream 4 Rx 2 3 15 Stream 4 Rx 3 Fig 3 15 Group delay result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements Group delay is a measure of phase distortion and defined as the derivation of phase over frequency To calculate the group delay the estimated channel is upsampled inactive carriers are interpolated and phases are unwrapped before they are differentiated over the carrier frequencies Thus the group delay indicates the time a pulse in the channel is delayed for each carrier frequency However not the
366. ize to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 117 Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 117 10 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 212 INPut IMPedance on page 213 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings CALCu late sn UNIT POWE ek un a 237 POWETAU TO
367. l user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much
368. le Rate on page 111 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 111 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 111 10 5 2 4 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL see INPut SELect on page 213 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INP ut IQ BALanced STATe ecce nune kp ce thee n ern ra tr haer aec 231 de izPismszD HE Uo 232 232 LEE 232
369. loat gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 Data File Format iq tar 1121 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel 1101 010 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 0111 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 1121 0121 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 1 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel
370. lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW page 215 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH On page 215 Write to CVL table name Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 105 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 222 Managing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found i
371. lt avg rms power gt lt max rms power gt lt min crest factor gt lt avg crest factor gt lt max crest factor gt lt min freq error gt lt avg freq error gt lt max freq error gt lt min symbol error gt lt avg symbol error gt lt max symbol error gt min IQ offset avg IQ offset max IQ offset min gain imb avg gain imb max gain imb gt min quad offset avg quad offset max quad offset min EVM all gt avg EVM all max EVM all gt lt min EVM data gt lt avg EVM data gt lt max EVM data gt lt min EVM pilots gt lt avg EVM pilots gt lt max EVM pilots gt lt min BER gt lt avg BER gt lt max BER gt lt min IQ skew gt lt avg skew gt lt max IQ skew gt lt min MIMO gt lt avg MIMO gt lt max MIMO CP gt lt min CPE gt lt avg CPE gt lt max CPE gt See Result Summary Detailed on page 44 See Result Summary Global on page 45 FETCh BURSt AM AM COEFficients This remote control returns the coefficients of the polynomial regression model used to determine the AM AM result display See AM AM on page 23 for details Retrieving Results Return values lt Coefficients gt comma separated list of numeric values The coefficients are listed in ascending order of degree as dis played in the result display title bar Example FETC BURS AM COEF Usage Query only FETCh BURSt BERPilot AVERage FETCh BURSt B
372. lt of the average or maximum EVM limit check for pilot carriers The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt EVM PILot MAXimum on page 282 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt FERRor AVERage RESult CALCulate LIMit BURSt FERRor MAXimum RESult This command returns the result of the average or maximum center frequency error limit check The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt FERRor MAXimum on page 282 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset AVERage RESuIt CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset MAXimum RESult This command returns the result of the average or maximum offset limit check The limit value is defined by the standard or the user see CALCulate LIMit BURSt IQOFfset MAXimum on page 282 Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded 10 9 2 Retrieving Results Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror AVERage RESult CALCulate LIMit BURSt SYMBolerror MAXimum RESult This command
373. lt state the name of the window is its index numeric value Index of the window LAY CAT Result Two windows displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Configuring the Result Display Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command
374. m damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 212 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 or 75 75 should be selected if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 adapter of the RAZ type 25 in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 213 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer al
375. m the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphica
376. m time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored For more information see chapter 4 9 4 Trigger Holdoff on page 87 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 244 Slope Trigger Source Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 247 FS Z11 Trigger Trigger Source Settings If activated the measurement is triggered by a connected R amp S FS Z11 trigger unit simultaneously for all connected analyzers This is useful for MIMO measurements in simultaneous measurement mode see Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup on page 132 The Trigger Source is automatically set to External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 125 The required connections between the analyzers the trigger unit and the DUT are indica ted in the graphic For details see chapter 4 9 6 Trigger Synchronization Using an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit on page 87 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Capture Offset Trigger Source Settings This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data WLAN IQ Meas
377. mand Usage Query only FETCh BURSt STARts This command returns the start position of each analyzed PPDU in the current capture buffer Retrieving Results Return values lt Position gt Comma separated list of samples or symbols depending on the UNIT BURSt command indicating the start position of each PPDU Usage Query only UNIT BURSt Unit This command specifies the units for PPDU length results see FETCh BURSt LENGths on page 310 Parameters Unit SYMBol SAMPle RST SYMBol 10 9 1 2 Error Parameter Results The following commands are required to retrieve individual results from the WLAN IQ measurement on the captured data see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flat ness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 5525 312 1 1 6 6 313 FETCH BURSUBERPIOUAV BRAGG rci trente nudare tac de ra Rue tigre ERE AR TEE e X ER EUR 314 FETChiBURSEBERPIIOEMAXIWIITI 72 0 314 FEIGIBURSEBERPIOEMJINIIURLS ipn ra Rex i rapa neca Cmn 314 FETCH BURSECPERIOMAV BRAGG Lenin teer eb nete e tex 314 FETCh BURSECPERFOrCIMADXIRED
378. mble in and in dB calculated according to the IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS definition of the normalized error vector magnitude see Peak Vector Error IEEE method on page 21 The corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated PPDU EVM EVM Error Vector Magnitude over the complete PPDU including the pream ble in and dB offset dB Transmitter center frequency leakage relative to the total Tx channel power see chapter 3 1 1 1 I Q Offset on page 17 Gain imbalance dB Amplification of the quadrature phase component of the signal relative to the amplification of the in phase component see chapter 3 1 1 2 Gain Imbal ance on page 17 Quadrature error Measure for the crosstalk of the Q branch into the I branch see Gain imbal ance offset quadrature error on page 69 Center frequency error Hz Frequency error between the signal and the current center frequency of the R amp S FSW the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indica ted The absolute frequency error includes the frequency error of the R amp S FSW and that of the DUT If possible the transmitterR amp S FSW and the DUT should be synchronized using an external reference See R amp S FSW User Manual Instrument setup External reference Chip clock error ppm Clock error between the signal and the chip clock of the R amp S FSW in parts per million ppm i e
379. measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital 1 on page 126 TUNit Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance If activated the measurement is triggered by a connected R amp S FS Z11 trigger unit simultaneously for all connected analyzers For details see chapter 4 9 6 Trigger Synchronization Using an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit on page 87 RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 125 See Free Run on page 125 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 125 See Baseband Power on page 126 See Digital I O on page 126 See RF Power on page 127 See 1 0 Power on page 127 See Power Sensor on page 127 See Time on page 128 See FS Z11 Trigger on page 129 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 128 Configuring the Trigger
380. ment setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 236 5 3 3 4 Amplitude Settings Access Overview Input Frontend Amplitude Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels R amp S FSW K91 Configuration WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Mode Manual Auto Reference Lvl Preamplifier Input Coupling Offset Unit Impedance RF Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value Reference Level Selliligs e re ee pes EMEN GE 118 L Reference Level 118 L Reference LOVel o niei rm tree ci ner treten e n 119 L Signal Level MB ee rcs cun s Pn enata 119 L Shifting the Display Offset cccccsssssssssesessseccsesssescsesssessesseeeseseseeeaes 119 Lo E app see scans sitet abc 119 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 120 alas sursis m 120 L Attenuation Mode 2277 120 Using Electronic Altemuatioti 5 5 2 1 02 anana a ana AAN NN 120
381. ments IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p the results are grouped by symbol and carrier OoGAebAhlIIAALQBDCbSSQS OEESEx AAG y 6D2SLLP User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 25 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Bitstream Carrier Symbol 1 26 000010 110111 111110 23 000001 010100 0 20 011001 101010 010101 1 001010 011100 101010 14 111100 001010 001101 011011 111110 010010 111100 0 001100 001101 111100 101100 101010 100011 NULL 101010 101101 101010 011010 000101 010001 0 101101 001011 10 000110 100100 100101 13 101001 111101 101011 16 011100 111001 010010 19 110100 111001 0 22 000011 101111 101111 25 001111 111100 Carrier Symbol 2 Fig 3 7 Bitstream result display for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac n p standards For MIMO measurements IEEE 802 11ac n the results are grouped by stream sym bol and carrier 1 4 5 1 Stream2 Stream3 Stream 4 3 2 Stream 2 Symbol 1 4 Carrier Symbol 1 01001010 10010110 01110110 122 11001110 11100000 01110011 11111101 10010010 01110101 119 10100111 01100010 11100001 10010011 00110000 10000110 116 01000011 01110001 00101110 11000101 00010010 01111110 113 10110010 10000100 10011010 10010101 00100101 10100100 110 11100110 11111110 11101101 10001011 00011011 01001010 107 10001111 01110101 01111010 10100100 0 10111101 104 00001001 0 11011100 00111000 10101111 10110011 4 101 11100010 00110011 10101111 3 3 Stream 3 3 4 Stream
382. meric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 NAN 10 2 6 2 10 2 6 3 10 2 6 4 10 2 6 5 Introduction Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 2 2 Long and Short Form on page 193 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal
383. mined by automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Upper The upper limit is fixed defined by the Minimum Maximum settings while the lower limit is determined by automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 299 Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower For automatic scaling based on hysteresis the hysteresis intervals are defined here Depending on whether either of the limits are fixed or not see Auto Fix Range one or both limits are defined by a hysteresis value range The hysteresis range is defined as a percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis Example The currently displayed value range on the y axis is 0 to 100 The upper limit is fixed by a maximum of 100 The lower hysteresis range is defined as 10 to 10 If the minimum value in the current measurement drops below 10 or exceeds 10 the y axis will be rescaled automatically for example to 10 100 or 10 100 respec tively Upper HIU If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds the speci fied range the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically Lower HIL If the minimum value in the current measurement exceeds the speci fied range the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCA
384. mmand specifies which WLAN standard the option is configured to measure The availability of many commands depends on the selected standard Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Standard gt Manual operation 0 IEEE 802 11a 1 IEEE 802 11b 2 IEEE 802 11j 10 MHz 3 IEEE 802 11j 20 MHz 4 IEEE 802 119 6 IEEE 802 11n 7 IEEE 802 11n MIMO 8 IEEE 802 11ac 9 IEEE 802 11p RST 0 See Standard on page 96 CALCulate LIMit TOLerance Limit This command defines or queries the tolerance limit to be used for the measurement The required tolerance limit depends on the used standard Parameters Limit Manual operation PRIOR11 2012 STD11 2012 P11ACD5 1 PRIOR11 2012 Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11 specification prior to 2012 Default for OFDM standards except 802 1 1ac STD11 2012 Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11 specification from 2012 Required for DSSS standards Also possible for OFDM stand ards except 802 11ac P11ACD5 1 Tolerance limits are based on the IEEE 802 11ac specification Required by IEEE 802 11ac standard RST STD11 2012 See Tolerance Limit on page 96 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 10 5 2 Configuring the Data Input and Output P 211 e UsngExerialMIXO S terio e tene a
385. more than one data stream MIMO measurement setup see chapter 4 3 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n on page 71 each result display contains several tabs The results for each data stream are displayed in a separate tab In addition an overview tab is provided in which all data streams are displayed at once in individual subwind ows 1 Magnitude Capture RRIA Rx 1 Rx2 Rx3 Rx4 LTR T Freq 5 775 GH Att 24 dB PASO 1 2 Rx 2 Freq 5 775 GHz Att 24 dB 0 08 5 0 0 08 1 3 Rx 3 Freq 5 775 GHz Att 24 dB PASO 1 4 Rx 4 Freq 5 775 GHz Att 24 dB 5 0 0 8 Fig 3 17 Magnitude Capture display for MIMO measurement with 4 Rx antennas For the Magnitude Capture display each subwindow contains additional information for each Rx antenna namely Antenna number Center frequency Mechanical attenuation ATT in dB Electronical attenuation EL in dB Reference offset EXT in dB Preamplification PA in dB Numeric trace results are not available for this evaluation method Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CMEM LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 15 Magnitude Capture on page 341 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 37 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Phase Error vs Preamble Displays the phase error values recorded over the preamble part of the PPDU A mini mum average and
386. mp S FSW WLAN application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base system Spectrum application to perform the WLAN frequency sweep measurements Some parameters are set automatically according to the WLAN 802 11 standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation These parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measure ment Refer to the description of each measurement type for details The main measurement configuration menus for the WLAN frequency sweep measure ments are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available via the Overview e Channel Power ACLR 0 1 01111 170 e Spectrum EMISSION MasK icti siepe manta tenen 171 Occupied Bandwidth cnr tere ote dio e er rb es led ze dida 172 CCP cT UMP 173 Channel Power ACLR Measurements The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyzes the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX chan nel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class The bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of th
387. mple Rate Fs Input sample rate PPDU MCS Index Gl WLAN 802 1 1a ac n j p The PPDU type MCS Index and Guard Interval used for the analysis of the signal Depending on the demodulation settings these values are either detected automatically from the signal or the user settings are applied PPDU Data Rate WLAN 802 116 The PPDU type and data rate used for the analysis of the signal Depend ing on the demodulation settings these values are either detected auto matically from the signal or the user settings are applied Standard Selected WLAN measurement standard Meas Setup Number of Transmitter Tx and Receiver Rx channels used in the mea surement for MIMO Capt time No of Samples Duration of signal capture and number of samples captured No of Data Symbols The minimum and maximum number of data symbols that a PPDU may have if it is to be considered in results analysis Analyzed PPDUs x of y z For statistical evaluation over PPDUs see PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 lt x gt PPDUs of totally required lt y gt PPDUs have been analyzed so far lt z gt PPDUs were analyzed in the most recent sweep In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is d
388. n 10 13 Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN applica tion This example demonstrates how to configure a WLAN 802 11 measurement in a remote environment e Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy for WLAN 802 11n Standard 356 e Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission 359 10 13 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy for WLAN 802 11n Standard This example demonstrates how to configure a WLAN IQ measurement for a signal according to WLAN 802 11n standard in a remote environment Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the WLAN option 91 INSTrument SELect WLAN Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt aa Configuring the result display Activate following result displays 1 Magnitude Capture default upper left 2 Result Summary Detailed below Mag Capt 3 Result Summary Global default lower right 4 EVM vs Carrier next to Mag Capt LAY REPL 2 RSD LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH EVC Result 4 e Signal description Use measurement standard IEEE 802 111 CONF STAN 6 Center frequency is 13 25 GHz FREQ CENT 13 25GHZ lt lt lt lt lt Configuring Data Acquisition Each measurement captures data for 10 ms SWE TIME 10ms Set the input sample rate for the captured I Q data to 20
389. n CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Text gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 108 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 109 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be select
390. n a passive spatial mapping matrix which does not increase the total transmitted power If this command is set to OFF the normalization step is omitted Parameters State Manual operation See Power Normalise on page 155 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch STS I lt STS Q gt lt STS I sSTS Q gt lt TimeShift gt This remote control command specifies the mapping for all streams real amp imaginary data pairs and timeshift for a specified antenna Parameters lt STS gt Imag part of the complex element of the STS Stream lt STS Q gt Real part of the complex element of the STS Stream Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance lt TimeShift gt Time shift for specification of user defined CSD cyclic delay diversity for the Spatial Mapping Range 32 ns to 32 ns Default unit ns Example CONF WLAN SMAP TX 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 3 0 4 0 4 0 16 9 Manual operation See User Defined Spatial Mapping on page 156 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX lt ch gt STReam lt stream gt STS I lt STS Q gt This remote control command specifies the mapping for a specific stream and antenna Parameters lt STS gt Imag part of the complex element of the STS Stream lt STS Q gt Real part of the complex element of the STS Stream Example WLAN SMAP TX4 STR1 1 0 1 0 Manual operation See User Defined Spatial Mapping on page 156 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch TIM
391. n frequency selective fading channels VTC 97 pp 1807 1811 2 Schmidl Cox Robust Frequency and Timing Synchronization of OFDM IEEE Trans on Comm Dec 1997 pp 1613 621 3 Minn Zeng Bhargava On Timing Offset Estimation for OFDM IEEE Communication Letters July 2000 pp 242 244 4 Speth Fechtel Fock Meyr Optimum receive antenna Design for Wireless Broad Band Systems Using OFDM Part I IEEE Trans On Comm VOL 47 NO 11 Nov 1999 5 Speth Fechtel Fock Meyr Optimum receive antenna Design for Wireless Broad Band Systems Using OFDM Part II IEEE Trans On Comm VOL 49 NO 4 April 2001 6 IEEE 802 112 Part 11 WLAN Medium Access Control MAC and Physical Layer PHY specifi cations 4 2 Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS This description gives a rough overview of the signal processing concept of the WLAN 802 11 application for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS signals Abbreviations timing offset NT frequency offset phase offset estimate of the gain factor in the I branch estimate of the gain factor in the Q branch accurate estimate of the crosstalk factor of the Q branch in the I branch estimated baseband filter of the transmit antenna estimated baseband filter of the receive antenna estimate of the IQ offset in the I branch estimate of the IQ offset in the I branch
392. n page 313 Scaling AM Result Displays Scaling settings are available for the x axis or y axis of the following result displays e The available scaling settings and functions are identical for both axes but can be con figured separately roro 59 rec an Result Config Scaling X Scaling Y Automatic Grid Scaling Auto Fix Range Hysteresis Interval Upper HIU Hysteresis Interval Lower HIL Memory Depth a Per Division are 10 multiples 1 0 2 0 2 5 5 0 77 631770 3 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 164 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Automatic Ond SCANNING 165 UE 165 PRTG PREIS oie 165 Hysteresis Interval Ubpet LOWEST nesimi telle eene rte naa o e b nee Rae tenus 166 Minimum Maximini 5 roenan Ye FE EN 166 ee 167 Number of DIVISIONS 167 Scaling per divis cecer 167 Automatic Grid Scaling Activates or deactivates automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis for the specified trace display If enabled the R amp S FSW WLAN application automatically scales the x axis or y axis to best fit the measurement results If disabled the x axis or y axis is scaled according to the specified Minimum Maxi mum and Number of Divisions
393. n the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer New otim 106 106 Delete Ta 106 Import 107 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 107 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 107 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 222 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ment s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 103 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access
394. n the selected result displays Sequential using open switch platform The data streams are measured sequentially by a single analyzer connected to an additional switch platform that switches between antenna signals No manual inter action is necessary during the measurement The R amp S FSW WLAN application captures the 1 data for all antennas sequentially and calculates and displays the results individually for each data stream in the selected result displays automati cally A single analyzer and the Rohde amp Schwarz OSP Switch Platform is required to measure the multiple DUT Tx antennas the switch platform must be fitted with at least one R amp S OSP B101 option the number depends on the number of Tx antennas to measure The IP address of the OSP and the used module configu ration bank must be defined on the analyzer the required connections between the DUT Tx antennas the switch box and the analyzer are indicated in the MIMO Signal Capture dialog box For important restrictions concerning sequential measurement see chap ter 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement on page 76 Sequential using manual operation The data streams are captured sequentially by a single analyzer The antenna sig nals must be connected to the single analyzer input sequentially by the user In the R amp S FSW WLAN application individual capture buffers are provided and displayed for each antenna input source so that results for the individual da
395. nal and spectrum analyzers RST Example CONF WLAN GTIM AUTO TYPE DL Manual operation See Guard Interval Length on page 148 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe SELect lt GuardTime gt This remote control command specifies the guard time the PPDUs in the IEEE 802 11n or ac input signal should have If the guard time is specified to be detected from the input signal using the CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO command then this command is query only and allows the detected guard time to be obtained Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt GuardTime gt SHORt NORMal SHORt Only the PPDUs with short guard interval are analyzed NORMal Only the PPDUs with long guard interval are analyzed Long in manual operation RST NORMal Example CONF WLAN GTIM SEL SHOR Manual operation See Guard Interval Length on page 148 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping MODE Mode This remote control command specifies the special mapping mode Parameters Mode DIRect SEXPansion USER DiRect direct SEXPansion expansion USER user defined Manual operation See Spatial Mapping Mode on page 155 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping NORMalise State This remote control command specifies whether an amplification of the signal power due to the spatial mapping is performed according to the matrix entries If this com mand it set to ON then the spatial mapping matrix is scaled by a constant factor to obtai
396. nals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap 1 0 on page 123 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally 10 5 4 2 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 123 TRACe IQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired 1 data Thus the user sample rate can be modified without affecting the actual data capturing settings on the R amp S FSW Parameters lt SampleRate gt The valid sample rates are described in chapter A 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 361 RST 32 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 122 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 3 4 2 Trigger Settings on page 123 The oPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the Sweep is completed and the data ha
397. nalysis according to the Space Time Block Cod ing STBC field content Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUs using a STBC field content identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only if STBC field 1 1 Stream M1 IEEE 802 11 Only PPDUs with the specified STBC field content are analyzed Meas only if STBC field 2 2 Stream 2 IEEE 802 11N Only PPDUs with the specified STBC field content are analyzed WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Demod all as STBC field 1 D1 IEEE 802 11N All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field content Demod all as STBC field 2 D2 IEEE 802 11N All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field content Meas only if STBC 1 Nsts 2Nss M1 IEEE 802 11AC Only PPDUs with the specified STBC field content are analyzed Demod all as STBC 1 2Nss D1 IEEE 802 11AC All PPDUs are analyzed assuming the specified STBC field content Remote command CONFigure WLAN STBC AUTO TYPE on page 265 Table info overview Depending on the selected channel bandwidth MCS index or NSS STBC the rele vant information from the modulation and coding sc
398. narai 318 5 318 FETCH BURSEOUADOTISSE MINIMUM trien de xv ane ten rper ede evene nenas 318 tuned 318 FETGIEBURSERMS MAXIDETIT x ceras ua ta ruo XY EY DRE 318 FEIGHIBURSERMS MIBIINERE sioe tua tpa tete na ta E ERU by aa E Car o bea Fea bM YR 318 FEIChHBURSESYMBolermmorAVERBge casco reete ertt eae aun Cetus ere euo 318 FETCHIBURSESYMBOol rrorMAXImUIIT 22 2 3 2 7 2 02 1 0 318 FETCh BURSt SYMBolerror MINiIMUM ccccceccccesescecencesesescecesseeececeesseseeseeeeseuseeeaaes 318 FETCh BURSCTEAELAVERSOGT iore derbi eee rende tl vene Ru leas ceed awed dB Qua 318 FETCh BURSETFEALBEMJAXINIITIT 5 1 235 102 aeu reve eaa avo nux des Ex VERE PvE Eva Yee eee Ex Pea eco eva ege 318 FETGIBURSE TPEALEMINIF IE 5 1 tance rtr era Den NY Rx 318 FETCh BURSETRIGS AVERAUE 2522 42 SY d pela 319 FETOCh BURSIETRISSIMPAOQIT i eaten tnu den na e ettet 319 FETCHhIBURSETERISeIMINIBIBIYY 12 2 2 eure ee eve ve ka ded a edo Eo aed ra coco iive 319 BVM ic
399. nds INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 92 Retrieving Results 10 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a WLAN measure ment in a remote environment Before retrieving measurement results check if PPDU synchronization was successful or not by checking the status register see chapter 10 11 1 STATus QUEStiona ble SYNC Register on page 347 If no PPDUs were found STAT QUES SYNC COND returns 0 see STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 352 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the trigger or data capturing settings are held off until after the data capture is completed and the data has been returned e Numeric Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Results 309 e Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep 322 e Trace Results eges teet tc Fa erect LE PERDRE RE Ed 327 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt 332 e Importing and Exporting Da
400. ned the effective channel can always be estimated from the known training fields Thus for some PPDUs or mea surement scenarios only the results based on the mapping of the space time stream to the Rx antenna effective channel are available as the mapping of the Rx antennas to the Tx antennas physical channel could not be determined For more information see chapter 4 3 3 Physical vs Effective Channels on page 74 Parameters lt gt EFFective PHYSical RST EFF Example CONF BURS SPEC FLAT CSEL PHYS Configures the Spectrum Flatness and Group Delay result dis plays to calculate the results based on the physical channel Usage Event 10 7 5 Configuring the AM AM Result Display The following commands are only relevant for the AM AM result display CONFigure BURSt AM AM POLYnomial lt Degree gt This remote control command specifies the degree of the polynomial regression model used to determine the AM AM result display The resulting coefficients of the regression polynomial can be queried using the FETCh BURSt AM AM COEFficients command Parameters lt Degree gt integer Range 1 to 20 RST 4 Example BURS AM AM POLY 3 Manual operation See on page 23 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO State DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State This command activates or deactivates a
401. nfiguration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Selecting the measurement type on page 91 2 Signal Description See chapter 5 3 2 Signal Description on page 95 3 Input Frontend 3 2 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance See and chapter 5 3 3 Input and Frontend Settings on page 97 4 Signal Capture See chapter 5 3 4 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 121 5 Synchronization OFDM demodulation See chapter 5 3 6 Synchronization and OFDM Demodulation on page 137 6 Tracking Channel Estimation See chapter 5 3 7 Tracking and Channel Estimation on page 138 7 Demodulation See chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation on page 141 8 Evaluation Range See chapter 5 3 9 Evaluation Range on page 156 9 Display Configuration See chapter 5 2 Display Configuration on page 93 To configure settings Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page
402. nfiguring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON 0 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 120 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt 110 OFF 1 ON 0 RST 0 Example 5 Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 120 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 241 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of
403. ng Out ihe EVENE Part caisse Rake RS 351 e Reading Out the CONDition Palt ioo retenu Renee nte 352 e Controlling the ENABle Part escenas eerte hpc ppc 352 e Controlling the Negative Transition 353 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part cene 353 General Status Register Commands STATUS PRESE M 351 STATus QUuEuel 351 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to ina CONDition is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt 10 11 3 3 10 11 3 4 Status Regis
404. nnelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Status Registers Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535
405. ntennas see chapter 4 3 2 Spa tial Mapping on page 73 Using space division multiplexing the transmitted data rates can be increased signifi cantly by using additional antennas To reduce the correlation between the propagation paths the transmit antenna can delay all of the transmission signals except one This method is referred to as cyclic delay diversity or cyclic delay shift The basis of the majority of the applications for broadband transmission is the OFDM method In contrast to single carrier methods an OFDM signal is a combination of many orthogonal separately modulated carriers Since the data is transmitted in paral lel the symbol length is significantly smaller than in single carrier methods with identi cal transmission rates Signal processing chain In a test setup with multiple antennas the R amp S FSW is likely to receive multiple spatial Streams one from each antenna Each stream has gone through a variety of transfor mations during transmission The signal processing chain is displayed in figure 4 3 starting with the creation of the spatial streams in the transmitting device through the wireless transmission and ending with the merging of the spatial streams in the receiv ing device This processing chain has been defined by IEEE The following figure shows the basic processing steps performed by the transmit antenna and the complementary blocks in reverse order applied at the receive
406. ntly defined limits are displayed here R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays Parameter Symbol clock error ppm Description Clock error between the signal and the sample clock of the R amp S FSW in parts per million ppm i e the symbol timing error the corresponding limits speci fied in the standard are also indicated If possible the transmitterR amp S FSW and the DUT should be synchronized using an external reference See R amp S FSW User Manual gt Instrument setup gt External reference CPE Common phase error Stream parameters Pilot bit error rate 96 EVM all carriers dB EVM Error Vector Magnitude of the payload symbols over all carriers the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated EVM data carriers dB EVM Error Vector Magnitude of the payload symbols over all data carriers the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated EVM pilot carriers dB EVM Error Vector Magnitude of the payload symbols over all pilot carriers the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated the limits can be changed via remote control not manually see chapter 10 5 9 Limits on page 280 in this case the currently defined limits are displayed here Table 3 2 WLAN I Q parameters for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS Parameter Description Sample Rate Fs Input
407. of the splitter lt Position gt New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 294 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is
408. om hardware damage provide for a high attenuation Use AC coupling for DC input voltage Amplification To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for low signal levels the sig nal level in the R amp S FSW should be as high as possible but without introducing com pression clipping or overload Provide for early amplification by the preamplifier and a low attenuation Impedance When measuring a 75 system connect an external matching pad to the RF input and adapt the reference impedance for power results The insertion loss is compensa ted for numerically 4 9 Triggered Measurements In a basic measurement with default settings the measurement is started immediately However sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement In FFT sweep mode the trigger defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion An Offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset For complex tasks advanced trigger settings are available e Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise SSE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 84 4 9 1 4 9 2 Triggered Measurements Holdoff to define e
409. ommand SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 222 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 224 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 225 Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 224 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains onl
410. ommand is only applicable to IEEE802 11b amp IEEE802 11g DSSS signals For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only 10 9 1 3 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt TRISe AVERage FETCh BURSt TRISe MAXimum FETCh BURSt TRISe MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum burst rise time in seconds This command is only applicable to IEEE802 11b amp IEEE802 11g DSSS signals For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only UNIT EVM lt Unit gt This command specifies the units for EVM limits and results see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB UNIT GIMBalance lt Unit gt This command specifies the units for gain imbalance results see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB UNIT PREamble lt Unit gt This command specifies the units for preamble error results Parameters lt Unit gt HZ PCT Limit Check Results The following commands are required to query the results of the limit checks Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere UNIT EVM on page 319 UNIT
411. on of the subsequent EVM measurement can be expected According to the IEEE 802 11a measurement standard 6 the coarse channel estima AS from the long symbol has to be used for equalization Therefore the default setting of the R amp S FSW WLAN application is equalization from the coarse channel estimate derived from the long symbol Calculating error parameters In the last block the parameters of the demodulated signal are calculated The most important parameter is the error vector magnitude of the subcarrier k of the current packet RCM 1 nof packets EVM gt EVM counter nof packets counter 1 Error vector magnitude of the subcarrier k in current packet 4 6 Furthermore the packet error vector magnitude is derived by averaging the squared EVM versus k 26 EVM Y EVM k 26 k 0 Error vector magnitude of the entire packet 4 7 Finally the average error vector magnitude is calculated by averaging the packet EVM of all nof_symbols detected packets 1 nof _symbols 2 EVM ra moa X 014 nof symbols 1 Average error vector magnitude 4 8 Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS This parameter is equivalent to the RMS average of all errors Errorgys of the IEEE 802 11a measurement commandment see 6 4 1 2 Literature on the IEEE 802 11a Standard 1 Speth Classen Meyr Frame synchronization of OFDM systems i
412. on the x axis or y axis displays multiples of 2 5 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 0 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 5 0 Each division on the x axis or y axis displays multiples of 5 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 5 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 303 5 3 11 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings and signal characteristics To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic settings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However the R amp S FSW WLAN application cannot per form data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto 168 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale l
413. one mea surement is running and you start another or switch to another channel the first mea surement is stopped In order to perform the different measurements you configured in multiple channels you must switch from one tab to another However you can enable a Sequencer function that automatically calls up each activa ted measurement channel in turn This means the measurements configured in the channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the corresponding tab as well as the Multi View as the measurements are performed Sequencer operation is independent of the currently displayed tab for example you can analyze the SEM measurement while the modulation accuracy measurement is being performed by the Sequencer For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual The Sequencer functions are only available in the MultiView tab Sequencer Stat niai e aen 92 Pe eed eda 92 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 308 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate
414. only EVCHip EVM vs Chip IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS only EVSYmbol EVM vs Symbol IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p only FEVPreamble Frequency Error vs Preamble Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type FSPectrum FFT Spectrum GAIN Gain Imbalance vs carrier GDELay Group Delay IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p only PEVPreamble Phase Error vs Preamble PFALling PvT Falling Edge PFPPdu PvT Full PPDU PRISing PvT Rising Edge PTRacking Phase tracking vs symbol QUAD Quadrature error vs carrier RSDetailed Result Summary Detailed IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p only RSGLobal Result Summary Global SFleld Signal Field IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS SFLatness Spectrum Flatness IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p only Window types for RF data DIAGram Diagram SEM ACLR MTABle Marker table SEM ACLR PEAKIist Marker peak list SEM ACLR RSUMmary Result summary SEM ACLR LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt Windowlndex Example string Name of the window In the defau
415. ons and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download fro
416. oon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the kn
417. ote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 215 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 215 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference Sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 105 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 216 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is
418. ote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 251 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 250 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 251 5 3 4 3 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 251 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 252 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is out
419. output sequence is described by Y s Data symbol estimation In the lower compensation branch the full compensation is always performed This separate compensation is necessary in order to avoid symbol errors After the full com pensation the secure estimation of the data symbols 4 is performed From FFT it is clear that first the channel transfer function H must be removed This is achieved by Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p dividing the known coarse channel estimate 5 calculated from the LS Usually an error free estimation of the data symbols can be assumed Improving the channel estimation In the next block a better channel estimate of the data and pilot subcarriers is calculated by using all nof symbols symbols of the payload PL This can be accom plished at this point because the phase is compensated and the data symbols are known The long observation interval of nof symbols symbols compared to the short interval of 2 symbols for the estimation of H S leads to a nearly error free channel estimate In the following equalizer block FC9 is compensated by the channel estimate The resulting channel compensated sequence is described by ys The user may either choose the coarse channel estimate HS from the long symbol or the nearly error free channel estimate from the payload for equalization If the improved esti mate H S is used a 2 dB reducti
420. ower level detection Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ON Automatic power level detection is performed at the start of each measurement sweep and the reference level is adapted accord ingly OFF The reference level must be defined manually see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 238 ONCE Automatic power level detection is performed once at the start of the next measurement sweep and the reference level is adap ted accordingly RST ON Manual operation See Reference Level Mode on page 118 See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 120 CONFigure POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Value This command is used to specify the auto track time i e the sweep time for auto level detection This setting can currently only be defined in remote control not in manual operation Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Auto level measurement sweep time Range 0 01 to 1 RST 0 15 Default unit 5 Example CONF POW AUTO SWE TIME 0 01 MS CONFigure POWer EXPected RF lt Value gt This command specifies the mean power level of the source signal as supplied to the instrument s RF input This value is overwritten if Auto Level mode is turned on Parameters lt Value gt Default unit DBM Manual operation See Signal Level RMS on page
421. own noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 114 4 7 3 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If it is provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a measurement start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a measurement start Trigger Armed Man
422. p out time is generally not allowed Triggered Measurements 4 9 4 Trigger Holdoff The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one will be recognized Frame 1 Frame 2 lt gt Holdoff Fig 4 10 Effect of the trigger holdoff See Trigger Holdoff on page 129 4 9 5 Trigger Synchronization Using the Master s Trigger Output For MIMO measurements in which the data from the multiple antennas is captured simultaneously by multiple analyzers see Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup on page 132 the data streams to be analyzed must be synchronized in time One pos sibility to ensure that all analyzers start capturing data at the same time is using the master s trigger output functionality The R amp S FSW has variable input output connectors for trigger signals If you set the master s TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector to device triggered output and con nect it to the slaves trigger input connectors the master R amp S FSW sends its trigger event signal to any connected slaves The slaves are automatically configured to use the trigger source External The master itself can be configured to use any of the fol lowing trigger sources External e Q Power F Power RF Power Power Sensor 4 9 6 Trigger Synchronization Using an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit For MIMO measurements in which the data from the multiple antennas is captured simult
423. page 101 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 101 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 102 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 214 Parameters Band 6 Standard waveguide band user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 102 Table 10 4 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 14
424. page 166 Parameters Value Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO HYST LOW LOW 5 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer lt Value gt DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the lower limit of the upper hysteresis interval If the maximum value in the current measurement drops below this limit the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt Value gt Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO HYST UPP LOW 25 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer lt Value gt DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the upper limit of the upper hysteresis interval If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds this limit the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166
425. path and name of the source file Example 10 5 1 R_S Instr user data iqw Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation Import on page 176 Analysis MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file Manual operation Q Export on page 176 10 10 Analysis The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers in standard WLAN measurements Currently only one Clear Write trace and one marker are available for standard W
426. pensated carrier wise I Q skew impair ments are compensated as well This setting is not available for standards IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS For details see chapter 3 1 1 5 I Q Mismatch on page 19 Note For EVM measurements according to the IEEE 802 11 2012 IEEE 802 11ac 2013 WLAN standard mismatch compensation must be deactivated Remote command SENSe TRACking IQMComp on page 258 Pilots for Tracking In case tracking is used the used pilot sequence has an effect on the measurement results This function is not available for IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS According to standard The pilot sequence is determined according to the corresponding WLAN standard In case the pilot generation algorithm of the device under test DUT has a problem the non standard conform pilot sequence might affect the measurement results or the WLAN appli cation might not synchronize at all onto the signal generated by the DUT WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Detected The pilot sequence detected in the WLAN signal to be analyzed is used by the WLAN application In case the pilot generation algorithm of the device under test DUT has a problem the non standard con form pilot sequence will not affect the measurement results In case the pilot sequence generated by the DUT is correct it is recommen ded that you use the According to Standard setting because it gen erates more accurate measurement result
427. plication data Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance For the R amp S FSW WLAN application the application data range is defined by the same commands used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see chapter 10 5 4 Signal Capturing on page 241 Be sure to select the cor rect measurement channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the WLAN measurement The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels lt gt 5 5 284 GALCulatesn MSRA ALINe VAlLue nerunt nune 284 CAbCulatespncMSRAMWINDOWshesIMAL id adr dee uota 285 gt 285 en ue 285 CALCulate lt n gt MS
428. plified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 241 INPut GAIN VALue on page 240 5 3 4 Signal Capture Data Acquisition You can define how much and how data is captured from the input signal WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the R amp S FSW WLAN application in MSRA mode define the application data extract See chapter 5 3 5 Application Data MSRA on page 137 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual General Capture 122 e mor SSU RM 123 e MIMO Capture 131 General Capture Settings The general capture settings define how much and which data is to be captured during the WLAN IQ measurement Signal Capture Trigger Source Trigger In Out Input Sample Rate Capture Time Swap IQ Filter Filter out Adjacent Channels input Sample Sale eret a a AE ANERE 122 123 A 123 Swap
429. points depends on the input sample rate and the capture time see Input Sample Rate on page 122 and Capture Time on page 123 Phase Tracking Returns the average phase tracking result per symbol in Radians These results are not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Power vs Time PVT All complete PPDUs within the capture time are analyzed in three master PPDUs The three master PPDUs relate to the minimum maximum and average values across all complete PPDUs This data is returned in dBm values on a per sample basis Each sample relates to an analysis of each corresponding sample within each processed PPDU For PVT Rising and PVT Falling displays the results are restricted to the rising or fall ing edge of the analyzed PPDUs The type of PVT data returned is determined by the TRACE number passed as an argument to the SCPI command TRACE1 minimum PPDU data values TRACE2 mean PPDU data values TRACE3 maximum PPDU data values Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 327 ASCii REAL 10 9 4 18 10 9 4 19 10 9 5 Retrieving Results Signal Field The bits are returned as read from the corresponding signal field parts in transmit order l e the first transmitted bit has the highest significance and the last transmitted bit has the lowest significance See also Signal Field on page 47 The TRAC DATA command returns the information as read from th
430. power The power distribution of the transmission matrix depends on the spatial mapping of the transmitted streams But even if all matrix elements carry power the gains may be dif ferent This is the reason why the traces are no longer scaled to 0 dB Although the absolute gain of the Spectrum Flatness is not of interrest it is now maintained in order to show the different gains in the transmission matrix elements Nevertheless the limit lines are still symmetric to the mean trace individually for each element of the trans mission matrix By default full MIMO equalizing is performed by the R amp S FSW WLAN application However you can deactivate compensation for crosstalk see Compensate Crosstalk MIMO only on page 141 In this case simple main path equalizing is performed only for direct connections between Tx and Rx antennas disregarding ancillary trans SSE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 79 4 4 4 5 Channels Carriers mission between the main paths crosstalk This is useful to investigate the effects of crosstalk on results such as EVM Channels and Carriers In an OFDM system such as WLAN the channel is divided into carriers using FFT IFFT Depending on the channel bandwidth the FFT window varies between 64 and 512 see also chapter 4 6 Demodulation Parameters Logical Filters on page 81 Some of these carriers can be used active carriers others are inactive e g guard carriers
431. ps 100 02 ms Stop 165 0 ps Fig 3 19 PvT Full PPDU result display for IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac n p standards 2 Full PPDU Rx 1 Rx2 Rx3 Rx4 2 1 1 et Mine 2 Avg 3 Max 116 625 625 0 ns 11 73 LIE 116 625 625 0 ns 11 73 yis Fig 3 20 PvT Full PPDU result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements For single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS the PVT results are dis played as percentage values of the reference power The reference can be set to either the maximum or mean power of the PPDU User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 40 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 1 PVT Full PPDU ei Mine2 Avg e 3 Max 94 67 15 941 704545455 Fig 3 21 PvT Full PPDU result display for IEEE 802 11b g DSSS standards Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PFPP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt PVT SELect on page 205 CONFigure BURSt PVT IMMediate on page 205 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 17 Power vs Time PVT on page 341 PvT Rising Edge Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time diagram for the rising edge of all PPDUs User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 41 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays 2 PVT Rising 1 Mine 2 Avg e 3 Fig 3 22 PvT Rising Edge result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PRIS see
432. ption B320 U320 veo LL LLLLLLLI A 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 Output sample 10000 fan MHz Fig 1 2 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated I Q Bandwidth Extension Option B500 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 provides measurement bandwidths up to 500 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 600 MHz proportional up to maximum 500 MHz 600 MHz to 10 GHz 500 MHz not MSRA master A 2 Data File Format iq tar bandwidths for RF input Usable I Q bandwidth MHz 500 Activated option oo B500 s 7 s EE in Output sample 200 280 360 44 600 10 rate fout MHz Fig 1 3 Relationship between maximum usable 1 0 bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B500 Data File Format iq tar data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar ig tar file contains data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the data a web browser
433. put to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate page 252 MIMO Capture Settings The following settings are only available for the IEEE 802 11ac and n standards Signal capture m Signal Capture Trigger Source Trigger In Out MIMO Capture DUT MIMO Config 1 Tx Antenna MIMO Antenna Signal Capture Setup Simultaneous Sequential using OSP Switch Box Sequential Manual Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup using 1 Rx Channel s 1 gt 1 Joined Rx Synchronization and Tracking WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance DUT 226 weet repe ete pte ae uae e dete 132 MIMO Antenna Signal Capture 132 Simultaneous Signal Capture 132 Lr or c 133 si E 192 L Analyzer IP Addiesg ierit nica aod nada 133 133 L Joined RX Sync and Tracking 133 L Reference Frequency 133 Sequential Using OSP Switch 134 u 44 np 135 L OSP Switch Bank
434. r ces for example e from the transmission paths inside the DUT from the connection between the analyzer and the DUT e from the analyzer itself The crosstalk from the analyzer can be neglected If the analyzer and DUT are connec ted by cable this source of crosstalk can also be neglected For further information on crosstalk see chapter 4 3 6 Crosstalk and Spectrum Flatness on page 79 4 3 4 Capturing Data from MIMO Antennas The primary purpose of many test applications that verify design parameters or are used in production is to determine if the transmitted signals adhere to the relevant standards and whether the physical characteristics fall within the specified limits In such cases there is no need to measure the various transmit paths simultaneously Instead they can either be tested as single antenna measurements or sequentially with restrictions see also chapter 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement on page 76 Then only one analyzer is needed to measure parameters such as error vector magnitude EVM power and 1 0 imbalance Measurements that have to be carried out for development or certification testing are significantly more extensive In order to fully reproduce the data in transmit signals or analyze the crosstalk between the antennas for example measurements must be per formed simultaneously on all antennas One analyzer is still sufficient if the system is using transmit diversity multiple input single o
435. r IEEE 802 11ac standard PPDIU Analysis Mode oreet e ec c te aee 145 rr i eee 1 145 Channel Bandwidth to measure 146 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance MGS Index tO c c ooi co a e a e e e nr eb d eo nd Cea dee reas X TO 146 MOS Index repete Sev gd 147 PSUS LEE 147 DII M M 147 SIBCEIBIB 147 Table info OVerview risen 148 Guard Interval Length dieci in ie terere neat net eco 148 PPDU Analysis Mode Defines whether all or only specific PPDUs are to be analyzed Auto same type as first PPDU The signal symbol field i e the PLCP header field of the first recog nized PPDU is analyzed to determine the details of the PPDU All PPDUSs identical to the first recognized PPDU are analyzed All subsequent settings are set to Auto mode Auto individually for each PPDU All PPDUs are analyzed User defined User defined settings define which PPDUS are analyzed This setting is automatically selected when any of the subsequent settings are changed to a value other than Auto Remote command SENSe DEMod FORMat BCONtent AUTO on page 271 PPDU Format to measure Defines which PPDU form
436. r each antenna Tx1 4 the complex element of each STS stream is defined The upper value is the real part part of the complex element The lower value is the imagi nary part of the complex element Additionally a Time Shift can be defined for cyclic delay diversity CSD The stream for each antenna is calculated as SSS EE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 73 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n Tx Stream T STS l Tx STSA STS Stream Tx Stream Tx STS l Tx STSA ASTS Stream 4 3 3 Physical vs Effective Channels The effective channel refers to the transmission path starting from the space time stream and ending at the receive antenna It is the product of the following compo nents the spatial mapping the crosstalk inside the device under test DUT transmission paths the crosstalk of the channel between the transmit antennas and the receive anten nas For each space time stream at least one training field the V HT LTF is included in every PPDU preamble see figure 4 4 Each sender antenna transmits these training fields which are known by the receive antenna The effective channel can be calcula ted from the received and known V HT LTF symbols of the preamble without knowl edge of the spatial mapping matrix or the physical channel Thus the effective channel can always be calculated HT mixed format PPDU 1 4 DataHT LTFs Extension HT LT
437. r frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband 1 If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 232 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended 1 data only Differential and inverse data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe page 231 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of
438. r of analyzed PPDUs Number of analyzed PPDUs in entire physical channel if available IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p standards Pilot bit error rate EVM all carriers dB EVM data carriers dB EVM pilot carriers dB Center frequency error Hz Symbol clock error ppm IEEE 802 11b g DSSS standards e Peak vector error e PPDU EVM e Quadrature offset Gain imbalance User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 46 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays OU r P G tame Quadrature error e Center frequency error Chip cock error Rise time Fall time Mean power e Peak power Crest power For details on the individual results and the summarized values see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSGL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Querying results FETCh BURSt ALL on page 312 Signal Field This result display shows the decoded data from the Signal field of each recognized PPDU This field contains information on the modulation used for transmission This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS use PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b g DSSS instead 2 Signal Field Format MCS CBW HT SIG Len Sym SNRA STBC GI Ness Alst Alst Alst Estimated Alst Alst Fig 3 27 Si
439. rate Reference frequency Coupling MIMO ieii a e 133 Reference level Auto level an eres 120 168 Auto level continuous 118 Digital 2 111 TIO Offset softkey 119 Unit 119 E 119 Refreshing itt trees 169 MSRA applications remote 285 MSRT applications remote 285 c MM 169 Remote commands Basics ON SVMAX cocci eter Ei eec 192 Boolean valles ideo 196 Capitalization 193 Character data 196 Data blocks 196 Numeric values 195 Obsolete 209 Optional KeywOFdS einer eie tonne choris 194 Paramelels coetui ec tete Eia Puck e eene 194 Strings iss ciiin iod estet rede 193 Repetition Interval ceteri m 128 Softkey 128 Resetting input POLE CHON uc cii titer ns 82 211 Restoring Channel setting S niuis aaia 95 Result configuration E 161 Result displays ectetuer eet ve Den aca AM EVM T vert haat Bitstream Configuration remote 288 Configuring 5 7
440. rd Interval Length Defines the PPDUs taking part in the analysis depending on the guard interval length Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PPDUS using the guard interval length identical to the first recog nized PPDU are analyzed Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed Meas only Short MS Only PPDUS with short guard interval length are analyzed Meas only Long ML Only PPDUs with long guard interval length are analyzed Demod all as short DS All PPDUs are demodulated assuming short guard interval length Demod all as long DL All PPDUs are demodulated assuming long guard interval length Remote command CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO on page 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO TYPE on page 262 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe SELect on page 263 5 3 8 5 Demodulation MIMO IEEE 802 11ac n The MIMO settings define the mapping between streams and antennas This tab is only available for the standard IEEE 802 11ac or n MIMO WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance 80 0MHz Standard Demodulation MIMO Spatial Mapping Spatial Mapping Mode Spatial Expansion Power Normalise User Defined Spatial Mapping STS 1 STS 2 STS 3 STS 4 Mapping
441. re CBW Defines the channel bandwidth of the PPDUS taking part in the analysis Depending on which standards the communicating devices are using different PPDU formats and channel bandwidths are supported For details on supported PPDU formats and channel bandwidths depending on the standard see table 4 1 Note The terms in brackets in the following description indicate how the setting is referred to in the Signal Field result display Format column see Signal Field on page 47 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st The channel bandwidth of the first valid PPDU is detected and subse quent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same channel band width Auto individually for each PPDU AI All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their channel bandwidth Meas only signal M Only PPDUS with the specified channel bandwidth are analyzed Demod all signal D All PPDUs are assumed to have the specified channel bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE on page 266 PSDU Modulation to use Specifies which PSDUs are to be analyzed depending on their modulation Only PSDUS using the selected modulation are considered in measurement analysis For details on supported modulation depending on the standard see table 4 1 Auto same type as first PPDU A1st All PSDUs using the same modulation as the first recognized PPDU are analyzed 5 3 8 2 WLAN IQ Measurement
442. ream 1 Stream2 Stream3 Stream 4 3 2 Stream 2 Carrier 122 Carrier 122 Carrier 122 3 3 Stream 3 3 4 Stream 4 Carrier 122 25 Carrier Carrier 122 Carrier 122 25 Carrier Carrier 122 Fig 3 12 EVM vs carrier result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in on page 338 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVC see on page 289 or on page 203 Querying results see on page 338 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 30 R amp S9FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays U M H HU R e o 546 EVM vs Chip This result display shows the error vector magnitude per chip This result display is only available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS Since the R amp S FSW WLAN application provides two different methods to calculate the EVM two traces are displayed vs Chip 1 Vector Error IEEE e 2 EVM Chip 1 27651 6 Chip Chip 276516 e Vector Error IEEE shows the error vector magnitude as defined in the IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS standards see also Error vector magnitude EVM IEEE 802 11b or g DSSS method on page 70 EVM shows the error vector magnitude calculated with an alternative method that provides higher accuracy of the estimations see also Error vector magnitude EVM R amp S FSW method on page 69
443. rement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance The following commands are required to configure the WLAN IQ measurement descri bed in chapter 3 1 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tol erance on page 13 DESPO use 209 e Configuring the Data Input and 222 2 4 4 1 4040000000 211 Frontend 234 e Signal nci rette uet ue iicet dede re urs 241 e Synchronization and OFDM Demodulation eese 256 e Tracking and Channel EStinauom eee enr dece n nie den etes 257 LEER ni m 260 e Evaa vies sa nsec ances reete max ei M 274 T 280 Selis 283 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 283 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal Useful commands for describing the WLAN signal described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 234 Remote commands exclusive to describing the WLAN signal CONFINE STANG o Ed 209 GAL GulateLIMIESTOLGEAOS 210 CONFigure STANdard lt Standard gt This remote control co
444. rently available on your R amp S FSW Select the WLAN item T WLAN The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the WLAN application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a WLAN measurement Select the Signal Description button to define the digital standard to be used Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal To define a particular starting point for the FFT or to improve the measurement speed for signals with a low duty cycle select the Synchronization OFDM Demod button and set the required parameters Select the Tracking Channel Estimation button to define how the data channels are to be estimated and which distortions will be compensated for Select the Demod button to provide information on the modulated signal and how the PPDUs detected in the capture buffer are to be demodulated Select the Evaluation Range button to define which data in the capture buffer you want to analyze How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters for WLAN Signals 11 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 12 Exit the SmartGrid mode 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings
445. responds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All recognized PPDUs are analyzed according to their individual Ness field contents corresponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MO 1 2 Only PPDUS with the specified Ness value are analyzed DO D1 D2 D3 All PPDUS are analyzed assuming the specified Ness value RST FBURst Example CONF WLAN EXT AUTO TYPE MO Manual operation See Extension Spatial Streams sounding on page 153 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO lt State gt This remote control command specifies whether the guard time of the input signal is automatically detected or specified manually IEEE 802 11n or ac only Parameters lt State gt ON The guard time is detected automatically according to CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO TYPE on page 262 OFF The guard time is defined by the CONFigure WLAN GTIMe SELect command RST ON Manual operation See Guard Interval Length on page 148 CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO TYPE Type This remote control command specifies which PPDUs are analyzed depending on their guard length if automatic detection is used CONF WLAN GTIM AUTO ON see CONFigure WLAN GTIMe AUTO on page 262 This command is available for IEEE 802 11 n ac standards only Note On previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers this command configured bo
446. returns the number of analyzed PPDUs from the current capture buffer If multiple measurements are required because the number of PPDUs to analyze is greater than the number of PPDUs that can be captured in one buffer this command only returns the number of captured PPDUs in the current capture buffer as opposed to FETCh BURSt COUNt ALL Usage Query only FETCh BURSt COUNt ALL This command returns the number of analyzed PPDUs for the entire measurement If multiple measurements are required because the number of PPDUs to analyze is greater than the number of PPDUs that can be captured in one buffer this command returns the number of analyzed PPDUS in all measurements as opposed to FETCh BURSt COUNt Usage Query only FETCh SYMBol COUNt This command returns the number of symbols in each analyzed PPDU as a comma separated list The length of the list corresponds to the number of PPDUs i e the result of FETCh BURSt COUNt ALL Usage Query only FETCh BURSt LENGths This command returns the length of the analyzed PPDUs from the current measure ment If the number of PPDUs to analyze is greater than the number of PPDUs that be captured one buffer this command only returns the lengths of the PPDUs the current capture buffer The result is a comma separated list of lengths one for each PPDU Return values lt PPDULength gt Length of the PPDU in the unit specified by the UNIT BURSt com
447. riers is removed by dividing by the symbols The result is a coarse esti mate Py of the channel transfer function In the next step the complex channel impulse response is computed by an IFFT Then the energy of the windowed impulse response the window size is equal to the guard period is calculated for each trial time After wards the trial time of the maximum energy is detected This trial time is used to adjust the timing Determing the payload window Now the position of the LS is known and the starting point of the useful part of the first payload symbol can be derived In the next block this calculated time instant is used to position the payload window Only the payload part is windowed This is sufficient because the payload is the only subject of the subsequent measurements In the next block the windowed sequence is compensated by the coarse frequency estimate A course This is necessary because otherwise inter channel interference ICI would occur in the frequency domain The transition to the frequency domain is achieved by an FFT of length 64 The FFT is performed symbol wise for each symbol of the payload nof symbols The calcula ted FFTs are described with 1 nof symbols as the symbol index e k 31 32 the channel index In case of an additive white Gaussian noise AWGN channel the FFT is described by 4 5 common timing 1 Lk ak J phase phase
448. rigger Baseband RF on page 113 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance 10 5 2 5 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in Configuring the Trigger Output on page 250 DIAG ROSTIE SERVICE 0 234 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off For details see chapter 4 7 2 Input from Noise Sources on page 82 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 114 10 5 3 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup LEE 511 234 e Amplitude 0 236 10 5 3 1 Frequency SENSe JFREQuency CENTGE tre aed coe bte tci eager 234 CENTONO T EP ta da rape tg ett t otra dehet ecce 235 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO centre tte tetti 235 SENSE FREQUENCY OPER SCE 25 0 rra cx eu TER CARDS 236 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency
449. rmed SENSe BURSt SELect lt Value gt This command selects the PPDU for which the trace data is queried using TRACe lt n gt DATA for the EVM vs Symbol and EVM vs Carrier result displays if SENSe BURSt SELect STATe is ON The selected PPDU does not affect the corresponding graphical trace displays Parameters Value Range 1 to statistic count RST 1 Example LAY WIND2 REPL EVSY SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 10 TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Returns the trace results for the PPDU number 10 in window 2 EVM vs Symbol SENSe BURSt SELect STATe lt State gt Determines whether a selected PPDU using SENSe BURSt SELect is consid ered or ignored Retrieving Results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Only the results for the selected PPDU are considered by a sub sequent TRACe lt n gt DATA query for EVM vs Symbol and EVM vs Carrier result displays OFF EVM vs Symbol result display query returns all detected PPDUs in the current capture buffer EVM vs Carrier result display query returns the statistical results for all analyzed PPDUs RST OFF Example LAY WIND2 REPL EVSY SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 10 TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Returns the trace results for the PPDU number 10 in window 2 EVM vs Symbol TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measuremen
450. rrent channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 95 10 4 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment The selected measurement must be started explicitely see chapter 10 8 Starting a Measurement on page 304 For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Dis plays on page 13 nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large bandwidth This measurement is selected when the WLAN measurement channel is activated The commands to select a different measurement or return to the WLAN IQ measurement are described here D WLAN IQ measurement captures the data from the WLAN signal using a Note that the CONF BURS ResultType IMM commands change the screen layout to display the Magnitude Capture buffer in window 1 at the top of the screen and the selected result type in window 2 below that Any other active windows are closed Use the LAYout commands to change the display see chapter 10 7 Configuring the Result Display on page 288 e Selecting the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Toler e Selecting a Common RF Measurement for WLAN Signals
451. rt file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW Analyzer and 1 Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 342 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command 5 lt gt 10 5 on page 343 How to Export and Import I Q Data data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting I Q data 1 Press the
452. rt of the IEEE 802 1 1ac signal field displayed for convenience see PPDU Format to measure on page 142 MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme MCS index of the PPDU as defined in IEEE Std 802 11 2012 section 20 6 Parameters for HT MCSs BW Channel bandwidth to measure 0 20 MHz 1 40 MHz 2 80 MHz 3 80 80 MHz and 160MHz L SIG Length Sym Human readable length of payload in OFDM symbols STBC Space Time Block Coding 0 no spatial streams of any user has space time block coding 1 all spatial streams of all users have space time block coding Gl Guard interval length PPDU must have to be measured 1 short guard interval is used in the Data field 0 short guard interval is not used in the Data field Ness Number of extension spatial streams Ness see Extension Spatial Streams sounding on page 153 CRC Cyclic redundancy code Table 3 7 Demodulation parameters and results for Signal Field result display IEEE 802 11n Parameter Description Format PPDU format used for measurement Not part of the IEEE 802 11n signal field displayed for convenience see PPDU Format to measure on page 142 MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme MCS index of the PPDU as defined in IEEE Std 802 11 2012 section 20 6 Parameters for HT MCSs CBW Channel bandwidth to measure 0 20 MHz or 40 MHz upper lower 1 40 MHz HT SIG Length Sym Human readable length of payload in OFDM symbols The number of octets of data in the PS
453. ry only Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt QUADoffset AVERage FETCh BURSt QUADoffset MAXimum FETCh BURSt QUADoffset MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum quadrature offset of sym bols within a PPDU This value indicates the phase accuracy For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh BURSt RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt RMS MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum RMS power in dBm for all analyzed PPDUs For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt Global Result Stream 1 result Stream n result Usage Query only FETCh BURSt SYMBolerror AVERage FETCh BURSt SYMBolerror MAXimum FETCh BURSt SYMBolerror MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum percentage of symbols that were outside the allowed demodulation range within a PPDU as defined by the stand ard For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Return values lt Result gt lt Global Result gt lt Stream 1 result gt lt Stream n result gt Usage Query only FETCh BURSt TFALI AVERage FETCh BURSt TFALI MAXimum FETCh BURSt TFALI MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum PPDU fall time in seconds This c
454. s Remote command SENSe TRACking PILots on page 259 Compensate Crosstalk MIMO only Activates or deactivates the compensation for crosstalk in MIMO measurement setups This setting is only available for standard IEEE 802 11ac or n MIMO By default full MIMO equalizing is performed by the R amp S FSW WLAN application However you can deactivate compensation for crosstalk In this case simple main path equalizing is performed only for direct connections between Tx and Rx antennas disregarding ancillary transmission between the main paths crosstalk This is useful to investigate the effects of crosstalk on results such as EVM On the other hand for cable connections which have practically no crosstalk you may get better EVM results if crosstalk is compensated for For details see chapter 4 3 6 Crosstalk and Spectrum Flatness on page 79 Remote command SENSe TRACking CROSstalk on page 258 5 3 8 Demodulation The demodulation settings define which PPDUs are to be analyzed thus they define a logical filter The available demodulation settings vary depending on the selected digital standard in the Signal Description see Standard on page 96 e Demodu lation IEEE 02 1 1a g OFDM p rhe 141 Demodulation IEEE 802 1186 iere Greece nk enero s eto enar 144 e Demodulatiori IEEE 802 11b 9 DSSS eenen tefte 148 Demodulation IEEE 902 11n ne eese teet riter
455. s depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range in the specified sub block PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W Retrieving Results For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range in the specified sub block OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only Manual operation See Channel Power ACLR on page 52 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 54 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 56 See Marker Peak List on page 57 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This comman
456. s see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers After an introduction to SCPI commands the following tasks specific to the WLAN application are described here e Common SUMXES eericarenee e ee Eee O e ER ee DER d 191 192 Activating WLAN 197 Selecting a Messi emet A 201 e Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Toler ci T 209 e Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on WLAN Signals 286 e Configuring the Result Display iei ete 288 Starting Measurement HR RR RR ER 304 e Retrieving 309 343 e DOUS REI OE 346 e Commands for 353 e Programming Examples R amp S FSW WLAN 356 10 1 Common Suffixes For the description of the remote commands
457. s 95 Remote control Softkey SIGMA field 2 saisi aea 271 Signal Field PPDW analysis is in piden 142 145 151 FRESUIE display nhe rre rn 47 Trace data ciet 342 Signal ID External MIXet ed ene RD Pg CE External Mixer Remote control Signal level Signal processing JEEE 802 114 g OFDM 58 JEEE 802 115 9 DSSS acredite 65 Signal source ene Certa Sea 213 Simultaneous MIMO capture method tern 132 Single Sequencer ieri 92 Single sweep SOflKGy eet t cs 169 Elio 71 lc a 19 Slave analyzers IP address MIMO scene teer 133 State MIMO tp 133 Slope BI 129 247 SmiattGfid ee tun Ace 22 93 softkey Average Length 91 91 Ref Pow Max Mean K91 91n Softkeys Amplitude Config Auto Level eet ees aad POW T editi endo peste erates Capture Offset cioe i e Pt Continue Single Sweep een 169 Continuous Sequencer 92 Continuous Sweep 169 Digital W O m 126 Display Config 1193 Export 176 External 125 Free RUN oie io th la thieves 125 Frequency CONG
458. s been returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditoris cemeterio itte s 243 e Configuring the Tigger 250 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement 5 12 441 1 00 enne nennen 244 SE Cue me DTME anexo ch enean ar oce regain 244 225 repere s 244 TRIGger SEQuence IFPowetlOLbDoft 244 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis cessere nennen 245 TRIGger SEQuence L EVelBBPOWSer 1 3 eere eec mua aca o HERE LA a 245 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port raaa aa a ai 245 5 1 1 246 5 tate pott 246 TRlIGger SEQuence L EVelPOWerAL auia 247 TRiGger SEQuence ct 247 TRIGE E 247 TRIGger SEQuenc
459. s measurement setup requires an additional R amp S OSP switch box For details on setting up and using this instrument see the corresponding documentation 1 Press the MODE key 2 Select the WLAN item gt R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the WLAN application 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a WLAN measurement 4 Select the Signal Description button to select the digital standard EEE 802 11ac or IEEE 802 11n R User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 182 R amp S FSW K91 How to Perform Measurements in the WLAN Application 5 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 6 Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 7 Select the MIMO Capture tab to define how the data from the MIMO antennas is to be captured a For the DUT MIMO Config select the number of TX antennas data will be transmitted from b Under MIMO antenna Signal Capture Setup select Sequential using OSP Switch box c Enter the IP address of the connected OSP switch box d For the OSP Switch Bank Configuration select the module used to connect the OSP switch box to the R amp S FSW Connect the antennas and the R amp S FSW to the OSP switch box as indicated in the dialog box f Configure the OSP switch box to switch bet
460. s see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parame ters on page 13 Parameters Limit numeric value in parts per million Default unit PPM Automatic Settings 10 5 11 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However WLAN 802 11 applications cannot perform data acqui sition in MSRA operating mode Useful commands for automatic configuration described elsewhere CONFigure POWer AUTO on page 237 CONFigure POWer AUTO SWEep TIME on page 237 Remote commands exclusive to automatic configuration amp 283 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 168 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the ap
461. s selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 219 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 219 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver sion Loss Table tab For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 107 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 220 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 220 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 220 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 220 WLAN IQ Meas
462. s transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 99 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Tip The I Q data to be analyzed for WLAN 802 11 can not only be measured by the WLAN application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the analyzed data from the WLAN application can be exported for further analysis in external applications See chapter 7 1 Import Export Functions on page 175 Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 98 See Digital Input State on page 110 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 112 10 5 2 2 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be inst
463. sample rate PPDU Type of the analyzed PPDU Data Rate Data rate used for analysis of the signal SGL Indicates single measurement mode as opposed to continuous Standard Selected WLAN measurement standard Meas Setup Number of Transmitter Tx and Receiver Rx channels used in the measure ment Capture time Duration of signal capture No of Samples Number of samples captured sample rate capture time No of Data Symbols The minimum and maximum number of data symbols that a PPDU may have if it is to be considered in results analysis Analyzed PPDUs For statistical evaluation of PPDUs see PPDU Statistic Count No of PPDUs to Analyze on page 158 x PPDUs of totally required y PPDUs have been analyzed so far z indicates the number of analyzed PPDUS in the most recent sweep Number of recognized PPDUS global Number of PPDUs recognized in capture buffer Number of analyzed PPDUS global Number of analyzed PPDUS in capture buffer Number of analyzed PPDUS in physical chan nel Number of PPDUs analyzed in entire signal if available AU M AMORC NN MNMVGLC I M B A N User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 15 WLAN Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameter Peak vector error Description Peak vector error EVM over the complete PPDU including the prea
464. scription button to select the digital standard EEE 802 11ac or IEEE 802 11n 5 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 6 Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 7 Forthe master analyzer only How to Analyze WLAN Signals in a MIMO Measurement Setup Select the MIMO Capture tab to define how the data from the MIMO antennas is to be captured a For the DUT MIMO Config select the number of TX antennas data will be transmitted from b Under MIMO antenna Signal Capture Setup select Simultaneous C For each connected R amp S FSW enter the IP address and assign an antenna that this analyzer slave will capture data from d Ensure that the State of each analyzer is On and the connection is estab lished the lights should be green in the dialog box e Connect the assigned antenna to each R amp S FSW 8 To define a particular starting point for the FFT or to improve the measurement speed for signals with a low duty cycle select the Synchronization OFDM Demod button and set the required parameters 9 Select the Tracking Channel Estimation button to define how the data channels are to be estimated and which distortions will be compensated for e g crosstalk between the MIMO antennas at the DUT 10 Select the Demod button to provide information on the modulated signal and how
465. signal Note The measured signal and reference signal are complex signals AM EVM For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal The y axis value represents the length of the error vector between the measured signal and the reference signal Note The measured signal and reference signal are complex signals Bitstream Data is returned depending on the selected standard for which the measurement was executed see CONFigure STANdard on page 209 R amp S9FSW K91 Remote Commands for WLAN Measurements 10 9 4 5 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM j n p standard OFDM physical layers For a given OFDM symbol and a given subcarrier the bitstream result is derived from the corresponding complex constellation point according to Std 802 11 2012 Fig ure 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encoding The bit pattern binary representation is converted to its equivalent integer value as the final measurement result The number of values returend for each analyzed OFDM symbol corresponds to the number of data subcarriers plus the number of pilot subcariers Nsp in remote mode As opposed to the graphical Bitstream results the DC and NULL carriers are not avail able in remote mode Standard CBW in Nsp Number of data Number of pilot Total number subcarriers subcarri
466. sis Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 0 Example SENS TRAC TIME ON Manual operation See Timing Error Tracking on page 140 SENSe see also SENSe commands Demodulation The demodulation settings define which PPDUs are to be analyzed thus they define a logical filter The available demodulation settings vary depending on the selected digital standard see CONFigure STANdard on page 209 Manual configuration is described in chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation on page 141 Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance CONFigure WLANEX Tension AUTO TYPE recepi er orm te ea ax eno 261 COR Figure WLABEOTIMe AI aa RE HP exe eR ERR eens 262 CONFigure WLANXSTIMe ABTO T Y PE paini a a aait 262 WILANIGOTIMESELSoL nta eti tte eb dan ee teet ees 263 GONFigure WLEAN SMAPpingiMOD E 2 2 ira thor ea a 264 5 1 12 4 0 0 006 nene 264 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch eise nnne neret 264 CONFigure WLAN SMAPping TX ch STReamcstream essen 265 lt gt 265 CONFigure AUTON TYPE
467. space time encoder This means each block represents the same data but with a different coding The resulting blocks are referred to as space time streams STS Each stream is sent to a different Tx antenna This diversity coding increases the signal to noise ratio at the receive antenna The pilot carriers are inserted after the data carriers went through the STBC Thus only the data carriers are decoded by the analyzer to determine characteristics of the demodulated data see also figure 4 6 In order to transmit the space time streams two or more antennas are required by the sender and one or more antennas are required by the receive antenna 4 3 2 Spatial Mapping The Spatial Encoder see figure 4 3 is responsible for the spatial multiplexing It defines the mapping between the streams and the transmit antennas referred to as Spatial mapping or as a matrix the spatial mapping matrix In the R amp S FSW WLAN application the mapping can be defined using the following methods e Direct mapping one single data stream is mapped to an exclusive Tx antenna The spatial matrix contains 1 on the diagonal and otherwise zeros Spatial Expansion multiple different data streams are assigned to each antenna in a defined pattern e User defined mapping the data streams are mapped to the antennas by a user defined matrix User defined spatial mapping You can define your own spatial mapping between streams and Tx antennas Fo
468. sult displays are updated for the individual data streams when the measurement is stopped User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 183 How to Analyze WLAN Signals in a MIMO Measurement Setup To perform a simultaneous measurement with multiple R amp S FSWs and an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit This measurement setup requires as many R amp S FSWs as Tx antennas are used They must all be connected via LAN Select one R amp S FSW as a master It is assumed the R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit is set up according to the following illustration DUT MASTER ANALYZER RF INPUT NOISE SOURCE RF OUTPUT 1 TRIGGER INPUT RF OUTPUT 2 RF OUTPUT 3 SLAVE ANALYZER 1 RF OUTPUT 4 RF INPUT TRIGGER OUTPUT TRIGGER INPUT SLAVE ANALYZER 2 RF INPUT TRIG OUT1 TRIGGER INPUT TRIG OUT2 TRIG Manual SLAVE ANALYZER 3 TRIG OUT3 RF INPUT NOISE SOURCE TRIG OUT4 TRIGGER INPUT Cable Trigger Cable Trigger optional DUT with TRIGGER OUTPUT Cable RF Fig 8 1 R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit connections Perform the following configuration on all R amp S FSWs except for the MIMO capture settings step 7 These settings are only required for the master analyzer 1 Press the MODE key 2 Select the WLAN item R amp S FSW opens new measurement channel for the WLAN application 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a WLAN measurement 4 Select the Signal De
469. t Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC2 LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 in window 2 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 53 Table 10 12 Limit line suffix lt k gt for WLAN application Suffix Limit 1t02 These indexes are not used 3 Limit line for Spectrum Emission Mask as defined by ETSI 4 Spectrum Flatness Upper limit line 5 Spectrum Flatness Lower limit line 6 Limit line for Spectrum Emission Mask as defined by IEEE Retrieving Results 7 PVT Rising Edge max limit 8 PVT Rising Edge mean limit 9 PVT Falling Edge max limit 10 PVT Falling Edge mean limit CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the results of power measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant This command is only available for measurements on RF data see chapter 3 2 Fre quency Sweep Measurements on page 51 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 305 Suffix lt sb gt 11213 4 5 Sub block Multi standard radio measurement MSR ACLR 1 to 5 Multi SEM 1 to 3
470. t results from the window previously selected using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect As opposed to the R amp S FSW base unit the window suffix lt n gt is not considered in the R amp S FSW WLAN application Use the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect to select the window before you query trace results For details see chapter 10 9 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 332 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Note that for the default WLAN I Q measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance only 1 trace per window TRACE 1 is available LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements Return values lt TraceData gt For more information see tables below Example Manual operation Retrieving Results DISP WIND2 SEL TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 in window 2 See AM AM on page 23 See on page 24 See AM EVM on page 24 See Bitstream on page 25 See Constellation on page 27 See Constellation vs Carrier on page 29 See EVM vs Carrier on page 30 See EVM vs Chip on page 31 See EVM vs Symbol on page 31 See FFT Spectrum on page 32 See Freq Error vs Preamble on page 34 See Gain Imbalance vs Carrier on page 34 See Group Delay on page 35
471. tGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display Config button in the configuration Overview see chapter 5 2 Display Configuration on page 93 Press the MEAS CONFIG hardkey and then select the Display Config softkey To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key MIMO measurements o When you capture more than one data stream MIMO measurement setup see chap ter 4 3 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n on page 71 each result display contains several tabs The results for each data stream are displayed in a separate tab In addition an overview tab is provided in which all data streams are displayed at once in individual subwindows The WLAN measurements provide the following evaluation methods ERR I 23 AMPM Jm 24 vizi e EE 24 S MISCO 25 Constellation iine eee e den etd e ead Eee de 27 Constellation a er beo 29 EVM ice irre ex eu te eeu re reed ved avr te y Nee eai vex y Da 30 BEA SIG ase as 45 X 31 EVM VS SVITIDOL dee ea 31 Spec itk irpo 32 Freq Emor vs Preatmble eroe rete e Set RE He nex sans
472. ta streams can be calculated The user must initiate data capturing for each antenna and result calculation for all data streams manually For important restrictions concerning sequential measurement see chap ter 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement on page 76 Single antenna measurement The data from the Tx antenna is measured and evaluated as a single antenna SISO measurement DUT MIMO configuration 1 Tx antenna 4 3 4 1 Sequential MIMO Measurement Sequential MIMO measurement allows for MIMO analysis with a single analyzer by capturing the receive antennas one after another sequentially However sequential MIMO measurement requires each Tx antenna to transmit the same PPDU over time The PPDU content from different Tx antennas on the other hand may be different If this requirement can not be fulfilled use the simultaneous MIMO capture method see chapter 4 3 4 Capturing Data from MIMO Antennas on page 75 eeu CAEDE E C ESSE User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 76 Rx1 Capture Memory Rx2 Capture Memory Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11ac n In addition the following PPDU attributes must be identical for ALL antennas PPDU length PPDU type Channel bandwidth MCS Index Guard Interval Length e Number of STBC Streams e Number of Extension Streams Thus for each PPDU the Signal Field bit vector has to be identical for ALL antennas same PPDU attr
473. ta and 342 10 9 1 Numeric Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the numeric results from the stand ard WLAN measurements nals are described in chapter 10 9 2 Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep Measure o The commands to retrieve results from frequency sweep measurements for WLAN sig ments on page 322 e PPDU and Symbol Count Results esee terc 309 e Error Parameter 0 4 7 44 311 e amp eere tete tare crore tere ticae coa 319 10 9 1 1 PPDU and Symbol Count Results The following commands are required to retrieve PPDU and symbol count results from the WLAN IQ measurement on the captured data see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters on page 13 FETCISB RSUGODEE i n ier eer derrota e teer nre ie tee rhe teret cv detest ee 310 FETOHBURSECOHUNPAIID t tse secte 310 aee md sHeot m timed ate 310 e UU 310 ees ml DE 310 ONT BURST 311 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt COUNt This command
474. te the following results Channel Flatness based on the effective channel Group Delay based on the effective channel e EVM of pilot carriers Constellation of pilot carriers e Bitstream of pilot carriers Spatial stream results If space time encoding is implemented the demodulated data must first be decoded to determine the following results e EVM of data carriers Constellation diagram Bitstream The pilot carriers are inserted directly after the data carriers went through the STBC 2 see also chapter 4 3 1 Space Time Block Coding STBC on page 73 Thus only the data carriers need to be decoded by the analyzer to determine characteristics of the demodulated data Because of this approach to calculate the EVM Constellation and Bitstream results you might get results for a different number of streams for pilots and data carriers if STBC is applied 4 3 6 Crosstalk and Spectrum Flatness In contrast to the SISO measurements in previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spec trum analyzers the spectrum flatness trace is no longer normalized to 0 dB scaled by the mean gain of all carriers For MIMO there may be different gains in the transmission paths and you do not want to lose the relation between these transmission paths For example in a MIMO trans mission path matrix we have paths carrying power usually the diagonal elements for the transmitted streams but also elements with only residual crosstalk
475. ted e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Usage Event Selecting a Measurement Manual operation See AM EVM on page 24 CONFigure BURSt AM PN IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be AM vs PM Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See on page 24 CONFigure BURSt CONSt CCARrier IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be Constellation vs Carrier Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate n IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Constellation vs Carrier on page 29 CONFigure BURSt CONSt CSYMbol IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be Constellation vs Symbol Results are only displayed after a measurement has been executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See Constellation on page 27 CONFigure BURSt EVM ECARrier IMMediate This remote control command configures the result display type of window 2 to be EVM vs Carrier Results are only displayed after a measurement is executed e g using the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command Usage Event Manual operation See EVM vs Carrier on page 30 Selecting a M
476. ter 10 9 4 12 EVM vs Symbol 339 FFT Spectrum This result display shows the power vs frequency values obtained from a FFT The FFT is performed over the complete data in the current capture buffer without any cor rection or compensation User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 32 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays O _ as 2 FFT Spectrum ei 16 0 MHz div Note MIMO measurements When you capture more than one data stream MIMO measurement setup see chapter 4 3 Signal Processing for MIMO Measurements IEEE 802 11 on page 71 each result display contains several tabs The results for each data stream are displayed in a separate tab In addition an overview tab is provided in which all data streams are displayed at once in individual subwind OWS 3 FFT Spectrum RX1 4 Rx1 Rx2 Rx3 Rx4 S 1 Rx 1 2 75 GHz 16 0 MHz Span 160 0 MHz 5 775 16 0 MHz Sp an 160 0 MHz Sume 16 0 MHz Span 160 0 MHz 5 775 16 0 MHz Span 160 0 MHz Fig 3 14 FFT spectrum result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chap ter 10 9 4 13 FFT Spectrum on page 340 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FSP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FFT IMMediate on page 206 Querying
477. ternal MIKEN etn aN External Mixer Remote control Threshold External Mixer remote control Threshold External Mixer Auto level Reference level 5 acere tires i i cero Auto settings Remote eim ces a Auto track time Remote i cec ege a 237 Band Conversion loss 108 External aene raza rir concen 102 External Mixer Remote control 217 Bandwidth Coverage MSRA mode 89 Extension options 961 362 Maximum 361 93 Relationship to sample rate 362 363 BB Power Trigger 5 126 Bias Conversion loss External Mixer External Mixer Remote control Bit error rate BER Ido DE 13 Bitstream Result display ca oor oio perro neret 25 Trace dala tna rne 335 Block diagram IEEE 802 11a 22 222 22 58 Capture buffer Is iU 36 Capture buffers Clearing MIMO ccrte einer e oir ect 136 Used MIMO 2022222 000 02000 0000
478. ters STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part
479. th the guard interval type and the channel bandwidth On the R amp S FSW this command only configures the guard type The channel bandwidth of the PPDU to be measured must be configured separately using the SENSe BANDwidth CHANnel AUTO TYPE command Configuring the WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt Type gt FBURst The Gurad interval length of the first PPDU is detected and sub sequent PPDUs are analyzed only if they have the same length corresponds to Auto same type as first PPDU ALL All PPDUs are analyzed regardless of their guard length corre sponds to Auto individually for each PPDU MS Only PPDUs with short guard interval length are analyzed corresponds to Meas only Short in manual operation MN8 MN16 parameters in previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers ML Only PPDUs with long guard interval length are analyzed corresponds to Meas only Long in manual operation ML16 ML32 parameters in previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers DS All PPDUs are demodulated assuming short guard interval length corresponds to Demod all as short in manual operation DN16 parameters in previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers DL All PPDUs are demodulated assuming long guard interval length corresponds to Demod all as long in manual operation DL16 DL32 parameters in previous Rohde amp Schwarz sig
480. the chip timing error the corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated If possible the transmitterR amp S FSW and the DUT should be synchronized using an external reference See R amp S FSW User Manual Instrument setup External reference Rise time Time the signal needs to increase its power level from 1096 to 9096 of the maximum or the average power depending on the reference power setting The corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated Fall time Time the signal needs to decrease its power level from 9096 to 1096 of the maximum or the average power depending on the reference power setting The corresponding limits specified in the standard are also indicated Mean power dBm Mean PPDU power Peak power dBm Peak PPDU power Crest factor dB The ratio of the peak power to the mean power of the PPDU also called Peak to Average Power Ratio PAPR The R amp S FSW WLAN application also performs statistical evaluation over several PPDUS and displays one or more of the following results 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 WLAN l Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Table 3 3 Calculated summary results Result type Description Min Minimum measured value Mean Limit Mean measured value limit defined in standard Max Limit Maximum measured value limit defined in standard Offset An offset in
481. the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application 2 Marker Peak List Tip To navigate within long marker peak lists simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 326 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 344 User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 57 Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in WLAN measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 4 1 Signal Processing for Multicarrier Measurements IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p This description gives a rough view of the signal processing when using the R amp S FSW WLAN application with the IEEE 802 11a g OFDM j p standards Details are disre garded in order to provide a concept overview Abbreviations symbol at symbol of subcarrier k EVM error vector magnitude of subcarrier k EVM error vector magnitude of current packet 9 signal gain Af frequency deviation
482. the source signal as supplied to the instrument s RF input This value is overwritten if Auto Level mode is turned on Remote command CONFigure POWer EXPected RF on page 238 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Settings Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 238 Unit Reference Level Settings The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input The following units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT PO
483. ther unknown signal parameters are estimated with a maximum likelihood based estimation which minimizes the cost function N 1 E 2 m 2 j atm at L lav x eI gixsi v joa x Salv Ago x Salv 0 v 0 Cost function for signal parameters 4 10 where 9 the variation parameters of the gain used in the I Q branch the crosstalk factor of the Q branch into the S V Sq v the filtered reference signal of the 1 Q branch The unknown signal parameters are estimated in a joint estimation process to increase the accuracy of the estimates Signal Processing for Single Carrier Measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS The accurate estimates of the frequency offset the gain imbalance the quadrature error and the normalized I Q offset are displayed by the measurement software Gain imbalance offset quadrature error The gain imbalance is the quotient of the estimates of the gain factor of the Q branch the crosstalk factor and the gain factor of the I branch 9 Gain imbalance Gain imbalance 4 11 The quadrature error is a measure for the crosstalk of the Q branch into the I branch Quadrature Error ARG Quadrature error crosstalk 4 12 The normalized 1 0 offset is defined as the magnitude of the offset normalized by the magnitude of the reference signal IQ Offset offset 4
484. tings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 217 Mixer Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 8 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 221 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 102 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second range based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band s frequency range WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 218 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 103 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 219 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type i
485. tion Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance General Capture Settings 0 5 242 SENSe1S WAP se icit etes ctor t dba gd x t 242 SENSe SWEep TIME cec 242 TRACIO 243 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution FlLTer STATe State This remote control command enables or disables use of the adjacent channel filter If activated only the useful signal is analyzed all signal data in adjacent channels is removed by the filter This setting improves the signal to noise ratio and thus the EVM results for signals with strong or a large number of adjacent channels However for some measurements information on the effects of adjacent channels on the measured signal may be of interest Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Suppressing Filter out Adjacent Channels IEEE 802 11a g OFDM ac j n p on page 123 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded pairs should be swapped 1 lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters State ON and Q sig
486. tion Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance Parameters lt PortType gt 213 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 109 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 106 See Edit Table on page 106 See File Name on page 108 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 225 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 109 Programming Example Working with
487. to minimize the intersymbol interference GlCenter Guard Interval Center The FFT start offset is placed to the cen ter of the guard interval PEAK The peak of the fine timing metric is used to determine the FFT start offset RST AUTO Manual operation See FFT Start Offset on page 137 SENSe DEMod TXARea lt State gt If enabled the R amp S FSW WLAN application initially performs a coarse burst search on the input signal in which increases in the power vs time trace are detected Further time consuming processing is then only performed where bursts are assumed This improves the measurement speed for signals with low duty cycle rates However for signals in which the PPDU power levels differ significantly this option should be disabled as otherwise some PPDUs may not be detected Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 A coarse burst search is performed based on the power levels of the input signal OFF 0 No pre evaluation is performed the entire signal is processed RST 1 Manual operation See Power Interval Search on page 137 Tracking and Channel Estimation cede eic a diets a tente 258 SENSe TRACkingiCROSStaIK rk descend Ti 258 SENSE TRAGKINGIOMGOM 2 258 bati
488. tor vss retient P RE ME be Pee EUER eel 141 e Evaluation e tea e ea dS saa ege 156 Overview Result ies 161 psu MM TE 168 e Sweep SeliligjS uiid tet gro tet pre rp bue Ge Ege gue e io appen 168 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Overview WLAN Modulation Accuracy Spectral Flatness Center Frequency Tolerance Sym Spatial Mapping 1 Magnitude Capture gt The Overview not only shows the main measurement settings it also provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The indicated signal flow shows which parameters affect which processing stage in the measurement Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For frequency sweep measurements see chapter 5 4 Fre quency Sweep Measurements on page 170 For the WLAN IQ measurement the Overview provides quick access to the following co
489. tream 3 Rx 3 2 12 Stream 3 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Carr arrie Carrier 25 Carr e _ 25 Carr Carrier 25 Carr 2 13 Stream 4 Rx 1 2 14 Stream 4 Rx 2 2 stream 4 Rx 3 2 16 Stream 4 Rx 4 Carrier 25 Car Carrie Carrier 25 Carr Fig 3 28 Spectrum flatness result display for IEEE 802 11n MIMO measurements The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chap ter 10 9 4 19 Spectrum Flatness on page 342 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SFL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONF BURS SPEC FLAT SEL FLAT see CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness SELect on page 206 and CONFigure BURSt SPECtrum FLATness IMMediate page 207 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 19 Spectrum Flatness on page 342 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements As described above the WLAN IQ measurement captures the data from the WLAN signal using a nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large bandwidth However some parameters specified in the WLAN 802 11 standard require a better signal to noise level or a smaller bandwidth filter than the measurement provides and must be determined in separate measurements Parameters that are common to several digital standards and are often required in sig nal and spectrum test scenarios can be determined by the standard measurements provided in the R amp S FSW base unit Spectrum application These measurements are performed using a much n
490. ts are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the WLAN application For details see the Common Analysis and Display Functions chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual o Analysis of frequency sweep measurements The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 10 Analysis on page 343 i Import Export Functions Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as I Q signals The complete modulation informa tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the baseband Importing and exporting I Q signals is useful for various applications Generating and saving signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later Capturing and saving signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW WLAN application As opposed to storing trace data which may be av
491. ttings define when data is captured Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 248 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 128 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Conne
492. ual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided D Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics 4 8 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters On the R amp S FSW the input data can only be processed optimally if the hardware set tings match the signal characteristics as closely as possible On the other hand the hardware must be protected from powers or frequencies that exceed the allowed limits Therefore you must set the hardware so that it is optimally prepared for the expected input signal without being overloaded You do this using the frontend parameters Consider the following recommendations Reference level Adapt the R amp S FSW s hardware to the expected maximum signal level by setting the Reference Level to this maximum Compensate for any external attenuation or gain by defining a Reference Level offset Attenuation To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for high signal levels and to protect the R amp S FSW fr
493. ult name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 197 For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 199 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 10 3 WLAN WLAN option R amp S FSW K91 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Selecting a Measurement Example INST WLAN Activates a measurement channel for the WLAN application INST WLAN Selects the measurement channel named WLAN for example before executing further commands for that channel SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the cu
494. ults TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 2 AM PM on page 335 AM EVM This result display shows the measured and the reference signal in the time domain For each sample the x axis value represents the amplitude of the reference signal The y axis value represents the length of the error vector between the measured signal and the reference signal The length of the error vector is normalised with the power of the corresponding refer ence signal sample This result display is not available for single carrier measurements IEEE 802 11b g DSSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 24 R amp S FSW K91 Measurements and Result Displays O eae ae eee SSS eee eee SS SSS SS 2 2 AM EVM 10 0 dBm Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH AMEV See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 289 or CONFigure BURSt AM EVM IMMediate on page 202 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 10 9 4 3 AM EVM on page 335 Bitstream This result display shows a demodulated payload data stream for all analyzed PPDUs of the currently captured I Q data as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display The bitstream is derived from the constellation diagram points using the constellation bit encoding from the corresponding WLAN standard See for example EEE Std 802 11 2012 Fig 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encod ing Thus the bitstream is NOT channel decoded For multicarrier measure
495. urement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Basic Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value TUAE 10 0 dB Bids SONNO cct 105 L write to lt CVL table name nentes 105 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 215 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in the VSA the Analyzer or the Real Time application for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Rem
496. urement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 285 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For simultaneous MIMO measurements see Simultaneous Signal Capture Setup on page 132 if you set the master s TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector to device triggered output the master R amp S FSW sends its trigger event signal to any connected slaves See also chapter 4 9 5 Trigger Synchronization Using the Master s Trigger Output on page 87 Rem
497. urement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Radio Frequency o Input Settings Digital IQ 1 0 Mode Input Config Analog Baseband High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Analog 58 2 ete ear e ln ed eine 112 VQ clo eT 112 Input Configuatioti 2 ioi Ks bann a Ri dara ud 113 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband 220 113 erudi pp M 113 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 213 Mode Defines the format of the input signal jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the cente
498. urrent measurement drops below the minimum of the lt x gt previous results and the lower limit is not fixed the x axis or y axis is rescaled Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh on page 301 Number of Divisions Defines the number of divisions to be used for the x axis or y axis By default the x axis or y axis is divided into 10 divisions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions on 302 Scaling per division Determines the values shown for each division on the x axis or y axis One or more multiples of 10 can be selected The R amp S FSW WLAN application then selects the optimal scaling from the selected values Example Multiples of 2 0 and 2 5 selected division range 80 130 number of divi sions 10 Possible scaling n 1 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 130 Multiples of 2 0 selected division range 80 130 number of divisions 10 Possible scaling n 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 1 0 Each division on the x axis or y axis displays multiples of 110 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 10 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 2 0 Each division on the x axis or y axis displays multiples of 2 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 2 5 Each division
499. utomatic scaling of the x axis or y axis Example DISP WIND1 TRAC Y AUTO FIX RANG LOW DISP WIND1 TRAC Y MIN OdBm Sets the lower limit of the y axis to a fixed value of 0 dBm Manual operation See Auto Fix Range on page 165 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer lt Value gt DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis _LOWer UPPer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the upper limit of the lower hysteresis interval If the minimum value in the current measurement exceeds this limit the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 Parameters lt Value gt Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the x axis or y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO HYST LOW UPP 5 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 166 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer lt Value gt DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis _OWer LOWer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the lower limit of the lower hysteresis interval If the minimum value the current measurement drops below this limit the x axis or y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on
500. utomatic scaling of the x axis or y axis for the specified trace display If enabled the R amp S FSW WLAN application automatically scales the x axis or y axis to best fit the measurement results If disabled the x axis or y axis is scaled according to the specified minimum maximum values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum and number of divi sions see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 1 DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe lt AutoFixRange gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe lt AutoFixRange gt This command defines the use of fixed value limits Parameters lt AutoFixRange gt NONE LOWer UPPer NONE Both the upper and lower limits are determined by automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis LOWer The lower limit is fixed defined by DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum while the upper limit is determined by automatic scaling of the x axis or y axis UPPer The upper limit is fixed while the lower limit is determined by a
501. utput MISO However space division multiplexing requires two or more analyzers to calculate the precoding matrix and demodulate the signals The R amp S FSW WLAN application provides the following methods to capture data from the MIMO antennas Simultaneous MIMO operation The data streams are measured simultaneously by multiple analyzers One of the analyzers is defined as a master which receives the data from the other ana lyzers the slaves The IP addresses of each slave analyzer must be provided to SSS User Manual 1173 9357 02 COMPANY RESTRICTED 75 R amp S FSW K91 Measurement Basics pam a ee et the master The only function of the slaves is to record the data that is then accu mulated centrally by the master Note that only the MIMO master analyzer requires the R amp S FSW K91n or ac option The slave analyzers do not require a R amp S FSW WLAN application The number of Tx antennas on the DUT defines the number of analyzers required for this measurement setup Tip Use the master s trigger output see chapter 4 9 5 Trigger Synchronization Using the Master s Trigger Output on page 87 or an R amp S 211 trigger box see chapter 4 9 6 Trigger Synchronization Using an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger Unit on page 87 to send the same trigger signal to all devices The master calculates the measurement results based on 1 0 data captured by all analyzers master and slaves and displays them i
502. was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 240 INPut EATT AUTO on page 240 INPut EATT on page 239 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings see chapter 5 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 97 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is am
503. ways uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 212 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 212 WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However the YIG filter may limit the bandwidth of the data and will add some magnitude and phase distortions You can check the impact in the Spec trum Flatness and Group Delay result displays Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILT
504. ween the antenna input as required 8 To define a particular starting point for the FFT or to improve the measurement speed for signals with a low duty cycle select the Synchronization OFDM Demod button and set the required parameters 9 Select the Tracking Channel Estimation button to define how the data channels are to be estimated and which distortions will be compensated for e g crosstalk between the MIMO antennas at the DUT 10 Select the Demod button to provide information on the modulated signal and how the PPDUS detected in the capture buffer are to be demodulated 11 Select the MIMO tab in the Demodulation dialog box to define which spatial mapping mode is used that is how the space time streams are mapped to the antennas a If necessary include a time shift for the individual antennas b Ifthe signal power is amplified according to the maxtrix entries so that the total transmitted power is not increased the measured powers can be normalised to consider this effect in demodulation 12 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which data in the capture buffer you want to analyze 13 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 14 Exit the SmartGrid mode 15 Start the measurement via the OSP switch box The data is captured from all antennas automatically The data is evaluated and the re
505. xactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig nal TAg ONSE TIO 85 e Trigger Hysteresis uiuere nen tinte panaia 85 e Trigger Drop Qut TMC riter tenni nde net rna ern sir eed 86 Tagger HOO iiri m Either eret ee eer Pera 87 e Trigger Synchronization Using the Master s Trigger 87 e Trigger Synchronization Using an R amp S FS Z11 Trigger 87 Trigger Offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pre trigger offsets are possible because the R amp S FSW captures data continuously in the time domain even before the trigger occurs See Trigger Offset on page 128 Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise for example The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs Example In the following example the second possible trigger event is ignored as the signal does not exceed the hysteresis threshold before it reaches the trigger level again on the rising edge On the falling edge however two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time
506. y The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Source Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector Radio Frequency State erre re repa 98 p e E 98 99 Direct Pathi 99 99 NSPS SSIS CO acts E 100 Input COMME ClO ss 5 AA NANNE 100 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 213 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument fro
507. y two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 223 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry WLAN IQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy Flatness Tolerance Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Digital Input Settings The following settin
508. ySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh MSRA only on page 169 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 10 6 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on WLAN Signals Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 123 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on WLAN Signals The R amp S FSW WLAN application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base system Spectrum applic

R&S®FSW-K91 WLAN Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW-K91 WLAN Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW-K91 WLAN Measurements User Manual